JP2021069842A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To execute a performance preferably.SOLUTION: On the basis of the fact that a small winning symbol is derived and displayed, a game state can be controlled to a time saving state from a normal state via a small winning game state. A display result of a small winning includes a display result of a small winning A or a small winning B which can be controlled to the time saving state and a display result of a small winning C which cannot controlled to the time saving state. The ratios to be the small winning A or the small winning B differ between a case where variation display of a first special symbol is executed and the small winning is obtained and a case where variation display of a second special symbol is executed and the small winning is obtained. A special variable winning ball device 090IW17 can control a game state to a first state in which game balls are easily won and a second state in which game balls cannot be won or difficultly won. Different performances can be executed when the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is opened between a case where the display result of the small winning A or the small winning B is derived and displayed and a case where the display result of the small winning C is derived and displayed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8-24

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine capable of playing a game.

As a game machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when the game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something that can be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variable display (also referred to as “variation”) of the identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the variable display device, the gaming state (game). The state of the machine. Therefore, specifically, the state in which the game machine is controlled) is changed to give a predetermined game value to the player (so-called pachinko machine).

The game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the game machine is in an advantageous state for the player who is likely to win a prize, or is in an advantageous state for the player. It is to generate rights and to be in a state where the conditions for paying out prize balls are easily satisfied.

In the pachinko gaming machine, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) started in the variable display device based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed. If so, a "big hit" will occur. The derivation display is to finally stop and display the symbol (final stop symbol). When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times to shift to a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win. Then, in each opening period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the large winning openings are won, the large winning openings are closed. The number of times the large winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the large winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each large winning opening may be referred to as a round. In addition, a game in a round may be called a round game.

Further, in the variable display device, symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left, middle, and right symbols) are stopped and shaken in a state of being consistent with a specific display result for a predetermined time. A big hit can occur before the final result is displayed due to movement, enlargement / reduction or deformation, multiple symbols fluctuating synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols being swapped. The effect performed in the state where the sex continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as the reach state) is referred to as the reach effect. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol that is variablely displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes "off" and the variable display state ends. The player plays the game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

In such a game machine, there is known a game machine that controls a specific game state that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display. Then, for example, in Patent Document 1, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a special game state in which a specific display result is more easily derived and displayed than the normal state is controlled without going through the specific game state. It is described that the game is controlled.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-80649 (Fig. 21 etc.)

However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is room for improvement in the control (including the control related to the production) when shifting the gaming state.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing an effect.

The gaming machine according to the present invention
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) based on the derivation display of a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol).
Step 090IWS462 and step 090IWS468 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 8-17, are state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. The part to execute) and
It has a special area (for example, V winning opening) and is controlled into a first state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can easily enter and a second state (for example, a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter. Possible variable means (for example, special variable winning ball device 090IW17) and
An effect executing means capable of executing the effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step S76) and
The variable display of the first identification information can be executed based on the passage of the game medium through the first start area, and the variable display of the second identification information is executed based on the passage of the game medium through the second start area. A possible variable display execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a portion for executing step S110 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided.
When a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed, the variable means can be controlled to the first state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-5, for game control. (Part of executing step S118 in the microcomputer 100),
The special display result is a first special display result (for example, a display result of small hit A or small hit B) and a second special display result (for example, small hit C) different from the first special display result. Display result), including
The state control means
In the normal state, when the game medium does not pass through the special area when the first special display result (for example, the display result of the small hit A or the small hit B) is derived and displayed, the special state is set. Control (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-18, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes the process of step 090IWS462 when Y at step 090IWS461a and step 090IWS468 when Y at step 090IWS467a).
In the normal state, if the game medium does not pass through the special area when the second special display result (for example, the display result of small hit C) is derived and displayed, the special state is not controlled (for example). For example, as shown in FIG. 8-18, when step 090IWS467 is N in the game control microcomputer 100, the processes of step 090IWS461a and step 090IWS462 and step 090IWS467a and step 090IWS468 are not executed).
The special display result is derived and displayed by executing the variable display of the first identification information, and the special display result is derived and displayed by executing the variable display of the second identification information. The ratio at which the second special display result is derived and displayed is different (for example, the portion shown in FIGS. 8-5 (C) (D)).
The effect executing means produces different effects when the variable means is in the first state depending on whether the first special display result is derived and displayed and the second special display result is derived and displayed. It is feasible (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-24, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing steps 090IWS887b and 887c, a portion shown in FIGS. 8-30 (K) and 8-32 (F)).
According to such a configuration, the effect can be suitably executed when the special display result is derived and displayed.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in the feature part 090IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the special variable winning ball device in the feature part 090IW. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like in a feature part 090IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the big hit determination table and the small hit determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit type determination table and the small hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of a small hit game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature part 090IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature part 090IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol process processing in a feature part 090IW. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the external output signal. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during small hit opening. It is a flowchart which shows the processing after closing small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the read-ahead notice setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the look-ahead notice production decision table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the look-ahead notice production decision table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the look-ahead notice production decision table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode when a small hit occurs. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode when a small hit occurs. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the modification of the opening pattern of a small hit game. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode when a small hit occurs. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode when a small hit occurs. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the modification of the opening pattern of a small hit game. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. (A) is a diagram showing an image display device, (B) is a diagram showing a rotation display of a hold display in each hold display area, and (C) is a diagram showing a movement display of a telop in a telop display area. , (D) is a diagram showing a blinking mode of the fourth symbol. It is explanatory drawing of the image data which constitutes the display in an image display apparatus. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a variable display result and a variation pattern. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a start winning command buffer. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning prize determination processing. This is a part of the flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the chance up effect. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the still image display effect, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect content of each effect pattern. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect content of each effect pattern. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach α1. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach α2. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach α3. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach α3. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach β1. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach β2. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach β3. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach β3. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 1st reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 1st reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 2nd reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 2nd reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 2nd reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 3rd reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 3rd reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 4th reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 4th reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 4th reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 2nd reach effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 4th reach effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 4th reach effect in the modification.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area), a variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening in which a game ball is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the first special figure game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

A general winning opening 10 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the lower left and right sides of the game area), which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area by the hitting ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, stick controller 31A and push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The general map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a common symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as the opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number cut (time cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, the time saving state is also called the low accuracy high base state, the probability variation state is called the high accuracy high base state, and the normal state is also called the low accuracy low base state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like / extinguishing, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability change symbol becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", the fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, thereby causing the image display device 5 to display the effect image. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.), as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, the effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and the effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change state, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, refer to the details. See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the start winning prize determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead determination is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, any one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to start the execution of the round in the big hit game state and open the big winning opening based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a jackpot game state when the maximum number of executions is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits includes a process for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the set contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of the winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature section 090IW)
Next, the feature unit 090IW of this embodiment will be described. In the feature unit 090IW, the gaming state is controlled to either a normal state (non-time saving state) or a time saving state. As will be described in detail later, it is possible to control from the normal state to the time saving state via the small hit game state based on the derivation and display of the small hit symbol. Further, the display result of the small hit includes the display result of the small hit A or the small hit B which can be controlled in the time saving state, and the display result of the small hit C which cannot be controlled in the time saving state. Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the display result which becomes a small hit is derived and displayed, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the display result which becomes a small hit is derived and displayed. The ratio at which the display result of the small hit A or the small hit B is derived and displayed is different.

In this example, in the time-saving state, the average special figure fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the normal state, and the average normal map fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the normal state, as compared with the normal state. There is a high probability that you will be hit by the average in the ordinary game. For example, while the probability of hitting a normal figure is 10% in the normal state, the probability of hitting a normal figure is increased to 90% in the time saving state, and a game ball wins in the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening). It will be easier to do. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, in the time saving state, the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) can be obtained by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B as compared with the normal state. It may be configured so that the game ball can easily win a prize.

In this example, the variation display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed in the time saving state, but the small hit probability is increased when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as described later. Since it is configured, the time saving state is easily controlled by the small hit game state.

(Board composition)
FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the feature unit 090IW. In the pachinko game machine 1 in the feature unit 090IW, in the game area, the first path of the flow path through which the game ball flows down is mainly provided in the area on the left side of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front, and the game is played. Of the flow paths through which the sphere flows, a second path different from the first path is mainly provided in the region on the right side of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front.

Hitting a game ball into the left side area (left side game area) of the image display device 5 in order to allow the game ball to flow down the first path is called left-handed hitting. Hitting a game ball into the right side area (right side game area) of the image display device 5 in order to allow the game ball to flow down the second path is called right-handed hitting. Since the first route is a route in which the game ball can flow down by hitting the game ball on the left side of the game area, it may be called a left-handed route. Further, the second route may be called a right-handed route because it is a route in which the game ball can flow down by hitting the game ball on the right side of the game area.

The first route and the second route may be configured by different routes, or may be partially shared routes. The left game area and the right game area may be separated by, for example, the end face of the image display device 5 or the arrangement of game nails in the game area.

When the game ball launched from the ball striking device and driven into the game area in response to the operation of the ball striking handle 30 is guided to the left game area, for example, is guided along an array of game nails. Therefore, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide to the right game area. Further, when the game ball is guided to the right game area, for example, by being guided along the arrangement of the game nails, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide the game ball to the left game area.

A winning ball device 6A constituting the first starting winning opening is provided as a structure in which a game ball hit into the left game area of the game area can enter.

As a structure in which the game ball divided into the right game area of the game area can enter, the passing gate 41, the variable winning ball device 6B constituting the second starting winning opening, and the special variable winning opening constituting the special winning opening A ball device 090IW17 and a special variable winning ball device 7 constituting a large winning opening are provided.

In the left game area, a game nail is planted so that the game ball is guided to the prize ball device 6A in the prize opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to allow the game ball to enter the winning ball device 6A, the player may hit the game ball to the left. Further, in the right game area, a game nail is provided so that the game ball is guided to the variable winning ball device 6B, the passing gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 090IW17, and the special variable winning ball device 7 among the winning opening structures. It has been planted. Therefore, when aiming to allow the game ball to enter the variable winning ball device 6B, the passing gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 090IW17, and the special variable winning ball device 7, the player can hit the game ball to the right. Good.

It should be noted that there is a possibility that the game ball hit in the right game area may enter the winning ball device 6A, but from the viewpoint of game playability, the possibility is the game hit in the left game area. It is desirable to make it extremely low compared to the likelihood that the balls will enter them. On the contrary, the game ball hit in the left game area may enter the passing gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, but from the viewpoint of game playability, the possibility is right. It is desirable to make it extremely low compared to the possibility that the game balls struck in the game area will enter them.

The special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is a device for determining V winning of a game ball, which is a condition for generating a big hit when a small hit occurs. The special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is in the first state (open state in which the bottom member 090IW17a is moved backward to move backward) in which the game ball is easy to win by moving the bottom member 090IW17a, or the game ball cannot enter. It is possible to control the second state (closed state in which the bottom member 090IW17a is moved forward toward the front), which is difficult to enter. The special variable winning ball device 090IW17 can be controlled to the open state when a small hit symbol different from the big hit symbol is derived and displayed.

In this example, it is possible to control the jackpot game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the V winning opening, which is a special area. Further, the ease of passing through the V winning opening of the game ball differs depending on whether the display result of the small hit A or the small hit B is derived and displayed and the display result of the small hit C is derived and displayed. As will be described later, when the display result of small hit A or small hit B is derived and displayed, it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the V winning opening, while the display result of small hit C is displayed. When the derivation is displayed, it is easy for the game ball to pass through the V winning opening. Then, when the display result of the small hit A or the small hit B is derived and displayed, and when the display result of the small hit C is derived and displayed, it differs when the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is opened. The production can be performed.

(Special variable winning ball device)
FIG. 8-2 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 in the feature unit 090IW. As shown in FIG. 8-2, the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is provided with a plate-shaped bottom member 090IW17a formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows, and the bottom surface member 090IW17a is provided in the small hit game state. The special winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened by moving the bottom member 090IW17a backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward. The game ball that has won (in other words, entered) in the special winning opening is detected by the special winning opening switch 090IW24.

In this example, when a game ball wins a prize in the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) and is detected by the count switch 23, 15 prize balls are obtained, whereas a special variable winning ball is obtained. When a game ball wins a prize in the ball device 090IW17 (special winning opening) and is detected by the special winning opening switch 090IW24, three prize balls shall be obtained.

Further, the bottom member 090IW17a is controlled from the closed state to the open state by driving the solenoid 090IW83 by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103).

In the feature unit 090IW, as shown in FIG. 8-2, the game ball winning in the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 (special winning opening) is further provided with a guidance path to the right of the special variable winning ball device 090IW17. Guided by 090IW01. The guidance path 090IW01 is further branched into two paths 090IW02,03, and the game ball guided by the guidance path 090IW01 is guided to the left side path 090IW02 or the right side path 090IW03. The left route 090IW02 is a V winning opening, and the game ball that has won the V winning opening is detected by the V winning opening switch 090IW20a. Further, the game ball that has passed through the right path 090IW03, that is, the game ball that has not won the V winning opening is detected by the non-V winning opening switch 090IW20b.

As shown in FIG. 8-2, a V winning opening opening / closing plate 090IW20 is provided near the entrance of the left side path 090IW02 (V winning opening), and the V winning opening opening / closing plate 090IW20 is guided when the V winning opening opening / closing plate 090IW20 is in the open state. The game ball guided to the route 090IW01 enters the left route 090IW02 (V winning opening), and the V winning opening is possible. Further, when the V winning opening opening / closing plate 090IW20 is in the closed state, the game ball guided by the guidance path 090IW01 enters the right side path 090IW03 and is discharged to the back side of the game area.

The V winning opening opening / closing plate 090IW20 is controlled from the closed state to the open state by driving the solenoid 090IW84 by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU103).

Further, in the feature unit 090IW, when controlled to the small hit game state, the game ball enters the V winning opening 090IW02 during the small hit gaming state, and is detected by the V winning opening switch 090IW20A. After the end of the small hit game, it is controlled to the big hit game state.

Further, in the main feature unit 090IW, when the small hit A or the small hit B is controlled to the small hit gaming state, the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 090IW02 during the small hit gaming state and is not V. On condition that it is detected by the winning opening switch 090IW20b, it is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the small hit game. On the other hand, if it becomes a small hit C and is controlled to the small hit gaming state, even if the game ball is detected by the non-V winning opening switch 090IW20b without entering the V winning opening 090IW02 during the small hit gaming state. , It is not controlled to the time saving state after the end of the small hit game.

In other words, in the case of small hit A or small hit B, if the game ball that won the special winning opening does not win V (when it does not pass through the V winning opening), it is controlled to the time saving state. In the case of a small hit C, even if the game ball that has won the special winning opening does not win the V prize (when it does not pass through the V winning opening), it is not controlled to the time saving state. However, in the case of a small hit A or a small hit B, the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is controlled to be in the open state so that it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the V winning opening 090IW02 during the small hit gaming state. When the small hit C is obtained, the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is controlled to be in the open state so that the game ball can easily enter the V winning opening 090IW02 during the small hit gaming state. Therefore, when it becomes a small hit A or a small hit B, it is easy to control it to a time saving state, but it is almost impossible to control it to a big hit state, while when it becomes a small hit A or a small hit B. It is impossible to control the time saving state, but it is easy to control it to the big hit state.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is formed with a plurality of regulation pieces for reducing the flow speed of the game ball flowing down on the bottom surface member 090IW17a. In this example, the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is provided with a regulation piece, so that the game ball that flows down from the upper right to the lower left direction meanders with the movement of the front-back direction component, so that the flow direction of the game ball is changed. Let it change and delay the time it takes to flow down than it would be without the regulatory strip.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-2, in the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 (special winning opening), the special winning opening switch 090IW24 is provided on the upstream side, and the V winning opening and the discharging port are provided on the downstream side. The case where the V winning opening switch 090IW20A is provided on the V winning opening side is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the V winning opening side and the general winning opening side are branched on the upstream side of the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 (special winning opening), and the V winning opening switch 090IW20A is provided on the V winning opening side. The special winning opening switch 090IW24 may be provided on the winning opening side.

(Board configuration)
FIG. 8-3 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like in the feature unit 090IW. As shown in FIG. 8-3, in the feature unit 090IW, the switch circuit 110 includes a gate switch 090IW021, a start port switch (first start port switch 22A and a second start port switch 22B), a count switch 090IW023, and a special winning opening. The detection signals from the switch 090IW24 and the V winning opening switch 090IW20a (such as a detection signal indicating that the game ball has passed or entered and the switch is turned on) are taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a solenoid 81, a solenoid 82, a solenoid 090IW83, a signal for turning on the solenoid 090IW84, etc.) from the game control microcomputer 100 to a solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or a big prize. It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 for the mouth door (special variable winning ball device 7), the solenoid 090IW83 for the special variable winning ball device 090IW17, and the solenoid 090IW84 for the V winning opening opening / closing plate 090IW20.

(Big hit judgment table and small hit judgment table)
FIG. 8-4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a big hit determination table and a small hit determination table. Of these, FIG. 8-4 (A) shows an example of a jackpot determination table. In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-4, the probability is about 1/200 regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. It is decided to make a big hit.

FIG. 8-4 (B) shows an example of a small hit determination table when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. Further, FIG. 8-4 (C) shows an example of a small hit determination table when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. As shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is determined that the small hit is made with a probability of about 1/500. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (C), in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, it is determined that the small hit is made with a probability of about 1/7.

(Big hit type judgment table, small hit type judgment table)
8-5 (A) and 8-5 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 8-5 (A) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 8-5 (B) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 8-5 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on a random number for determining the hit type when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. , It is a table referred to for determining the type of big hit to "10R time saving big hit".

As shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on a random number for determining the hit type when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. , It is a table referred to for determining the type of big hit to "10R time saving big hit".

The "10R time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 10 rounds and shifts to the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. After shifting to the time saving state, the time saving state is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

As shown in FIG. 8-5 (A), in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and a big hit is obtained, the 10R time saving big hit is determined with a 100% probability. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and a big hit is obtained, the 10R time saving big hit is determined with a 100% probability.

The jackpot type is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, even if the number of time reductions is different (for example, 3 or 5 times) and a plurality of types of time reduction jackpots are provided, or the number of rounds is different (for example, 2 rounds or 4 rounds) and a plurality of types of time reduction jackpots are provided. Good. Further, in this example, the case where only the time-saving jackpot that shifts to the time-saving state after the jackpot game ends is provided, but the non-time-saving jackpot (normal jackpot) that does not shift to the time-saving state after the jackpot game ends is provided. It may be configured. Further, in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the case where the 100R time saving jackpot is determined with a 100% probability is shown, but the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Even in this case, it may be configured to be determined by a plurality of types of jackpots.

FIG. 8-5 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. As shown in FIG. 8-5 (C), the small hit type determination table is based on a random number for determining the hit type when it is determined that the variable display result is to be a small hit symbol. It is a table referred to for determining the type as either "small hit A" or "small hit B" or "small hit C".

"Small hit A" means that the game ball that entered the special winning opening during the small hit game (1st round) did not win a V prize (detected by the non-V winning opening switch 090IW20b, and the V winning opening is not. It is a small hit that shifts to a time saving state after the small hit game is completed on condition that it is detected that the ball has passed. When the state shifts to the time saving state, the time saving state is maintained until the 10-time variation display is completed. The "small hit A" is a small hit that is controlled to the big hit game state of the second round to the fourth round on the condition that the V prize is won, and shifts to the time saving state after the end of the big hit game state. However, when it becomes "small hit A", the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is controlled so as not to win V.

"Small hit B" means that the game ball that entered the special winning opening during the small hit game (1st round) did not win a V prize (detected by the non-V winning opening switch 090IW20b and non-V winning opening). It is a small hit that shifts to a time saving state after the small hit game is completed on condition that it has been detected that the ball has passed. When the state is changed to the time saving state, the time saving state is maintained until the five fluctuation displays are completed. The "small hit B" is a small hit that is controlled to the big hit game state of the second round to the fourth round on the condition that the V prize is won, and shifts to the time saving state after the end of the big hit game state. However, when the "small hit B" is reached, the opening pattern for opening the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is controlled so as not to win the V prize.

"Small hit C" means that the game ball that entered the special winning opening during the small hit game (first round) did not win a V prize (detected by the non-V winning opening switch 090IW20b and does not pass through the V winning opening. Even if it is detected), it is a small hit that does not shift to the time saving state after the small hit game is completed. Further, the "small hit C" is a small hit that is controlled to the big hit gaming state of the second round to the fourth round on the condition that the V prize is won, and shifts to the time saving state after the end of the big hit gaming state. Then, when the "small hit C" is reached, the opening pattern for opening the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is controlled so as to win a V in most cases.

As shown in FIG. 8-5 (C), in this example, 25% of the cases where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained is determined as "small hit A", and 25% It is determined as "small hit B", and 50% is determined as "small hit C".

As shown in FIG. 8-5 (D), in this example, 5% of the cases where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained is determined as "small hit A", and 5% is It is determined as "small hit B", and 90% is determined as "small hit C".

The small hit type is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a plurality of types of time saving jackpots may be provided with different number of time saving times (for example, 3 times or 5 times). Further, it may be configured to provide a small hit without V winning, which is substantially impossible to win a V during the small hit game and does not shift to the big hit game after the small hit game.

Further, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of a small hit is higher than that when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. Therefore, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Has a higher rate of becoming a small hit A or a small hit B (that is, a small hit with a time reduction), but when the second special symbol variation display is executed, the small hit with a time reduction is 100%. You may hit it.

(Open pattern of small hit game)
Next, the opening pattern of the small hit game will be described. FIG. 8-6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of the small hit game. As shown in FIG. 8-6, when the small hit game is started at the timing S1 and the pre-opening period t1 (fanfare time) elapses, the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is controlled to the open state at the timing S2.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), in the case of small hit A or B (with time reduction), when the V winning opening opening / closing plate 090IW20 is controlled to the closed state, a special of 0.05 seconds After opening the variable winning ball device 090IW17 (special winning opening), after a closing time of 1 second, the special winning opening is opened and closed again for 0.05 seconds, and after a closing time of 12 seconds, the special winning opening is similarly opened. It opens and closes twice.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (B), in the case of small hit C (no time reduction), the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 (special winning) when the V winning opening opening / closing plate 090IW20 is controlled to the open state. By repeating the operation of opening the special winning opening for 0.05 seconds after opening the special winning opening for 0.05 seconds, after a closing time of 1 second, and then opening the special winning opening for 0.05 seconds again so that the mouth) is controlled to the open state, once. The special winning opening is opened 10 times with a small hit.

The operation of the V winning opening opening / closing plate 090IW20 is common to the small hit A or small hit B (with time reduction) and the small hit C (without time reduction), and in each case, it is opened for 8 seconds. ..

In this example, each opening time of the special winning opening in the small hit is as short as 0.05 seconds, but as already explained, the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is formed with a plurality of regulation pieces. On the bottom member 090IW17a of the special variable winning ball device 090IW17, about 2 to 3 game balls meander and flow down. Therefore, if the bottom member 090IW17a is controlled to be in the open state even if the opening time is short, The game ball on the bottom member 090IW17a can fall into the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 and enter.

Then, in the case of small hit C (no time reduction), the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is opened when the V winning opening opening / closing plate 090IW20 is in the open state, so that the game ball is won in the V winning opening. It is possible. Further, in the case of small hit A or B (with time reduction), when the V winning opening opening / closing plate 090IW20 is in the closed state, the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is opened, so that the game ball is opened in the V winning opening. It is impossible or difficult to win a prize.

Then, in the case of small hit C (no time reduction), the game ball that has entered the special winning opening is not controlled to the time saving state when the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening, but small hit A or B (with time reduction). In the case of, the game ball that has entered the special winning opening is controlled to a shortened time state when the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening. As a result, when the small hit is C (no time reduction), the game ball is likely to pass through the V winning opening and be controlled to the big hit state, but is not controlled to the small hit state, and the small hit A or B is not controlled. When (there is a time reduction), it is extremely unlikely that the game ball will be controlled to the jackpot state without passing through the V winning opening, but it is likely to be controlled to the time reduction state.

Then, if the game ball wins in the special winning opening and wins V, after the closing time (interval time) and the small hit end time (ending time) of a predetermined period have elapsed after the final opening of the special winning opening is completed. , The game shifts to the jackpot game state, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the open state from the second round to the fourth round.

In addition, in both cases of small hit A or B (with time reduction) and small hit C (without time reduction), the ending period shifts from timing S3 to S4, but small hit A or B (with time reduction). ), The ending period t3 is longer than the ending period t4 in the case of small hit C (no time reduction). For example, the ending period t3 is 10 seconds longer than the ending period t4. As a result, in the case of a small hit A or B (with a time reduction), it is possible to secure a time for displaying the start screen (see FIG. 8-30 (N)) in the time reduction state.

In the case of small hit A or B (with time reduction), the ending period may be changed depending on whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the V winning opening (that is, whether or not the time is reduced). Specifically, when the game ball does not win in the V winning opening, the time is controlled to be shortened. In this case, the ending period is lengthened.

As described above, in this example, different patterns are used when the display result of the small hit A or the small hit B is derived and displayed and when the display result of the small hit C is derived and displayed (open in this example). The number of times) can be used to control the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to preferably control whether or not to control the time saving state.

Specifically, in this example, the V prize that performs a common operation when the display result of the small hit A or the small hit B is derived and displayed and when the display result of the small hit C is derived and displayed. When the mouth opening / closing plate 090IW20 is provided and the display result of small hit A or small hit B is derived and displayed, when the V winning opening opening / closing plate 090IW20 is in a state of obstructing the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening. When the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is controlled to the open state and the display result of the small hit C is derived and displayed, the V winning opening opening / closing plate 090IW20 is in a state of not obstructing the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening. While the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is controlled to the open state. Therefore, it is possible to preferably control whether or not to control the time saving state.

(Variation pattern table)
FIG. 8-7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature unit 090IW. Of these, FIG. 8-7 shows a specific example of the variation pattern table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 8-8 shows a specific example of the variation pattern table for the second special symbol.

First, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-7. As shown in FIG. 8-7, in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if the variation is displayed during the normal state, the variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation) is used as the variation pattern. Fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (non-reach in normal fluctuation → development production), fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (non-reach in shortening fluctuation → development production), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 ( It is determined to be one of the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (normal reach → development effect), the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach α), and the fluctuation pattern PA2-4 (super reach β). Further, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed, if the deviation occurs during the time saving state, the fluctuation patterns include the fluctuation pattern PA1-5 (shortening fluctuation) and the fluctuation pattern PA1-6 (non-shortening fluctuation). Reach → development effect), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (normal reach → development effect), variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach α), variation pattern PA2-4 (super reach β) Is decided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-7, in this example, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed and a big hit occurs during the normal state, the fluctuation pattern PB1-1 (normal reach) is used as the fluctuation pattern. , The fluctuation pattern PB1-2 (super reach α) or the fluctuation pattern PB1-3 (super reach β) is determined. In addition, when executing the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, if a big hit occurs during the time saving state, the fluctuation patterns include the fluctuation pattern PB1-1 (normal reach), the fluctuation pattern PB1-2 (super reach α), and the fluctuation. It is determined to be one of the patterns PB1-3 (super reach β).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-7, in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the small hit C (no time reduction) occurs in the normal state, the variation pattern is set as the variation pattern. It is determined to be one of PC1-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PC1-2 (super reach α), and fluctuation pattern PC1-3 (super reach β). Further, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed, if the small hit C is obtained during the time saving state, the fluctuation patterns are the fluctuation pattern PC1-1 (normal reach) and the fluctuation pattern PC1-2 (super reach α). , The fluctuation pattern PC1-3 (super reach β) is determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-7, in this example, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed, when the small hit A or B (with time reduction) occurs in the normal state, the fluctuation pattern is set as the fluctuation pattern. Fluctuation pattern PC1-4 (non-reach in normal fluctuation → development production), fluctuation pattern PC1-5 (non-reach in shortened fluctuation → development production), fluctuation pattern PC1-7 (normal reach → development production) Will be done. In addition, when executing the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, if a small hit A or B (with time reduction) occurs during the time reduction state, the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern PC1-6 (non-reach in shortened fluctuation → It is determined to be either development effect) or variable pattern PC1-7 (normal reach → development effect).

Next, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-8. As shown in FIG. 8-8, in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if the variation is displayed during the normal state, the variation patterns are the variation pattern PA3-1 and the variation pattern PA3-. It is decided to be one of 2 (non-reach in normal fluctuation → development production). Further, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed, if the deviation occurs during the time saving state, the fluctuation patterns include the fluctuation pattern PA3-3 (shortening fluctuation) and the fluctuation pattern PA3-4 (non-shortening fluctuation). Reach → development production), fluctuation pattern PB3-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PB3-2 (normal reach → development production), fluctuation pattern PB3-3 (super reach α,) fluctuation pattern PB3-4 (super reach β) Is decided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-8, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if a big hit occurs during the normal state, the variation pattern PA3-5 (normal reach) is determined as the variation pattern. .. In addition, when executing the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, if a big hit occurs during the time saving state, the fluctuation patterns include the fluctuation pattern PC3-1 (normal reach), the fluctuation pattern PC3-2 (super reach α), and the fluctuation. It is determined to be one of the patterns PC3-3 (super reach β).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-8, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if the small hits A to C occur during the normal state, the variation pattern PA3-6 (normal reach) is used as the variation pattern. Will be decided. If a small hit C occurs during the time saving state, the fluctuation patterns include the fluctuation pattern PD3-1 (normal reach), the fluctuation pattern PD3-2 (super reach α), and the fluctuation pattern PD3-3 (super reach β). It is decided to be either.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-8, in this example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed, when the small hit A or B (with time reduction) occurs during the time reduction state, the fluctuation pattern is set as the fluctuation pattern. It is determined to be either the fluctuation pattern PD3-4 (non-reach in shortened fluctuation → development effect) or the variation pattern PD3-5 (normal reach → development effect).

Further, in this example, in the normal symbol process process (step S26), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the variation display result of the normal symbol is a hit (per ordinary symbol), and based on the determination result, the normal symbol is displayed. The control to execute the variable display is performed. In this example, it is decided that the normal state has a 10% probability of hitting the normal figure, and the time saving state has a 90% probability. It is decided that it will be a hit with a probability. Further, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) in the open state based on the determination that the normal symbol hit is achieved in the normal symbol process process (step S26).

As described above, in this example, the display result of the small hit A or the small hit B is derived and displayed, and the display result of the small hit C is derived and displayed. The rate at which development effects are executed is different. Specifically, in the case of small hit A or small hit B, the effect is pasted and the effect is executed, but in the case of small hit C, the development effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid inconsistency between the pre-reading notice effect and the effect after the big hit game state or the time saving state, so that the pre-reading notice effect can be preferably executed.

When the small hit A or the small hit B (with time reduction) is obtained, a fluctuation pattern common to the small hit C (without time reduction), the missed time, and the big hit may be provided.

(Direction control command)
FIG. 8-9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. In the example shown in FIG. 8-9, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. Is. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when any of the commands 80XX (H) is received, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is to be missed.

The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (10R time reduction jackpot designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is the 10R time reduction jackpot. The command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (small hit A designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the small hit A. The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (small hit B designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the small hit B. The command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (small hit C designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the small hit C. Is.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol.

The command B000 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the jackpot game. The command B001 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command: ending designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during the opening of the big winning opening) that specifies the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big winning opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

The command B300 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. The command B301 (H) is an effect control command (small hit A end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game of the small hit A. The command B302 (H) is an effect control command (small hit B end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game of the small hit B. The command B303 (H) is an effect control command (small hit C end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game of the small hit C.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a prize in the prize opening) that specifies that the game ball has won a prize in the prize opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening. The command B402 (H) is an effect control command (V winning opening winning designation command) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the V winning opening in the special winning opening. Command B403 (H) is a production control command (non-V winning designation command) that specifies that the game ball that has won the special winning opening does not win the V winning opening (that the game ball has not passed through the V winning opening). ).

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first hold storage number addition designation command) for designating that the first hold storage number has been increased by 1. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second hold storage number addition designation command) for designating that the second hold storage number has been increased by 1. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (first hold storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the first hold storage number has decreased by one. The command C101 (H) is an effect control command (second hold storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the second hold storage number has decreased by 1.

The command C4XX (H) and the command C6XX (H) are effect control commands (winning determination result designation commands) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is an effect control command that indicates whether or not a big hit is made, whether or not a small hit is made, the type of big hit, and the judgment result of the type of small hit among the judgment results at the time of winning. Design specification command). Further, the command C6XX (H) is an effect control command (variation category command) indicating the determination result of the variation pattern or the variation pattern type among the determination results at the time of winning.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (normal background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the normal state. The command E001 (H) is an effect control command (time saving background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the time saving state.

When the effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 8-9, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the voice control board 13. The effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 8-9 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating the game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

In this example, the presence or absence of the time saving state and the number of time saving can be identified depending on whether the command is the small hit A end designation command, the small hit B end designation command, or the small hit C end designation command. Whether or not a game ball that has won a prize in the mouth has won a prize in the V winning opening, in other words, whether or not a game ball that has won a special winning opening has won a prize in the V winning opening.

You may specify whether or not to control to the time saving state by transmitting the small hit end designation command according to (that is, whether or not to control to the time saving state).

(Special symbol process processing)
FIG. 8-10 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process processing in the feature unit 090IW. In this example, the start winning determination process (step 090IWS101) is substantially the same as the start winning determination process (step S101) shown in FIG. Further, the special symbol normal processing (step 090IWS110) to the special symbol stop processing (step 090IWS113) are substantially the same as the special symbol normal processing (step S110) to the special symbol stop processing (step S113) shown in FIG. However, in this example, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, the process proceeds to the small hit opening preprocessing (step 090IWS114). Further, when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed (so-called direct hit), the process proceeds to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step 090IWS117).

Small hit release pre-processing (step 090IWS114): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The game control microcomputer 100 executes a process of controlling the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 to the open state, and changes the internal state (specifically, the value of the special symbol process flag) to the small hit open process (step). Update to a value (5 in this example) according to 090IWS115).

Small hit opening process (step 090IWS115): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. If the opening time elapses while the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is open, the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is controlled to the closed state, and the closing time elapses while the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is closed and is still open. When the number of times remains, the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is controlled to be in the open state. Further, when the opening timing of the V winning opening opening / closing plate 090IW20 is reached, the V winning opening opening / closing plate 090IW20 is controlled to be in the open state, and when the closing timing of the V winning opening opening / closing plate 090IW20 is reached, the V winning opening opening / closing plate is opened. Control the 090IW20 to the closed state. Further, it is confirmed whether or not the V winning opening switch 090IW20a is turned on, and if the V winning opening switch 090IW20a is turned on, the V winning opening flag is set. When all the opening of the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is completed and the closing time (interval time) has elapsed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to the value corresponding to the small hit post-closing process (step 090IWS116) (step 090IWS116). In this example, update to 6).

Small hit closing post-processing (step 090IWS116): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. When the V winning flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (7 in this example) corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step 090IWS117). If the V winning flag is not set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 090IWS110).

The jackpot opening pre-processing (step 090IWS117) to jackpot end processing (step 090IWS120) is substantially the same as the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S114) to jackpot end processing (step S117) shown in FIG.

In this example, when the game is determined to be a big hit and the big hit / small hit symbol is derived and displayed, or after a V prize is generated during the small hit game and the small hit game is completed, the game immediately shifts to the big hit game. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, instead of immediately shifting to the jackpot game, the game is configured to shift to the jackpot game on the condition that the game ball has passed through the operating gate (which may also be used as the passing gate 41) provided in the game area. May be good.

(Starting prize judgment process)
FIG. 8-11 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process (step 090IWS101). In the start winning prize determination process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 090IWS1211). If the first start port switch 22A is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to step 090IWS1221. When the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first hold storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first hold storage for counting the first hold storage number). (Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4) is confirmed (step 090IWS1212).

If the first hold storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 103 increments the value of the first hold storage number counter by 1 (step 090IWS1213). Further, the CPU 103 increases the value of the total reserved storage number counter for counting the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number by 1 (step 090IWS1214). Next, the CPU 103 extracts a value from a counter for generating each random number such as a hit determination random number, a hit type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination random number, and stores them in a storage area in the first hold storage buffer. (Step 090IWS1215). A storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the number of first reserved storages (4 in this example) is secured in the first reserved storage buffer and is formed in the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning determination process for determining in advance the variation display result and the variation pattern when the variation based on the detected start winning is subsequently executed (step 090IWS1216). Then, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control CPU 120 based on the determination result of the winning determination process (step 090IWS1217), and also controls to transmit the variable category command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 090 IWS1217). Step 090IWS1218). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first hold storage number addition designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 090IWS1219). Then, the process proceeds to step 090IWS1221.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 090IWS1221). If the second start port switch 22B is not in the ON state, the process ends as it is. When the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second hold storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second hold storage for counting the second hold storage number). (Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4) is confirmed (step 090IWS1222).

If the second hold storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 103 increments the value of the second hold storage number counter by 1 (step 090IWS1223). Further, the CPU 103 increases the value of the total pending storage counter by 1 (step 090IWS1224). Next, the CPU 103 extracts a value from a counter for generating each random number such as a hit determination random number, a hit type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination random number, and stores them in a storage area in the second hold storage buffer. (Step 090IWS1225). A storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the number of second reserved storages (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer and is formed in the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning determination process (step 090IWS1226). Then, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control CPU 120 based on the determination result of the winning determination process (step 090IWS1227), and also controls to transmit the variable category command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 090IWS1227). Step 090IWS1228). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the second hold storage number addition designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 090IWS1229). Then, the start winning determination process is completed.

(Special design normal processing)
8-12 and 8-13 are flowcharts showing a special symbol normal process (step 090IWS110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step 090IWS51). Specifically, the count value of the total hold storage number counter for counting the total number of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number is confirmed. If the total number of reserved storages is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second number of reserved storages is 0 (step 090IWS52). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second hold storage number counter for counting the second hold storage number is 0. If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to the data indicating "second" (step 090IWS53). If the second reserved storage number is 0 (that is, when only the first reserved storage number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets the data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step 090IWS54).

In this feature unit 090IW, by executing the processes of steps 090IWS52 to S54, the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed with respect to the variation display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be satisfied in preference to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

Not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in the order in which the game balls are won in the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. It may be configured as follows.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 090IWS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = 1 in the first hold storage number buffer. The numerical value is read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer. Is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 090IWS56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first hold storage counter, and each storage area in the first hold storage buffer. Shift the contents of. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has a storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first hold storage number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value stored in is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always the first reserved storage number (or the first reserved storage number). The order of the second reserved memory) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage counter is subtracted by 1 (step 090IWS57). The CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the background designation command to the effect control CPU 120 according to the current gaming state (step 090IWS58). In this case, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the time saving background designation command when the time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set is set. Further, the CPU 103 normally controls to transmit the background designation command if the time saving flag is not set.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the hit determination random number from the random number buffer area (step 090IWS61) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 090IWS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the hit determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process (step 090IWS101) and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and performs a big hit determination. The jackpot judgment module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot judgment value (see Fig. 8-4 (A)) with a random number for hit judgment, and if they match, decides to make a jackpot. is there. That is, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process. When the value of the random number for hit determination matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is decided to make a big hit (Y in step 090IWS63), the process proceeds to step 090IWS64. On the other hand, if it is decided not to make a big hit (N in step 090IWS63), the process proceeds to step 090IWS67. It should be noted that deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big hit game state, but deciding whether or not to make the stop symbol on the special symbol display a big hit symbol. But also.

In step 090IWS64, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot. Then, the CPU 103 determines the type (10R time saving jackpot) corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the hit type determination random number stored in the random number buffer area as the jackpot type (step 090IWS65). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the hit type determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process (step 090IWS101) and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and determines the jackpot type. Further, the CPU 103 sets the data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 090IWS66). Then, the process proceeds to step 090IWS73.

On the other hand, in step 090IWS67, the CPU 103 selects the small hit determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer. In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the small hit determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8-4 (B) is selected, and the value of the special symbol pointer is set. When "second" is shown, the small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8-4 (C) is selected. Then, the CPU 103 uses the selected small hit determination table to perform a lottery process based on the hit determination random number, and determines whether or not to make a small hit (step 090IWS68). In this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-4 (B) and 8-4 (C), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the probability of being determined as a small hit is 0%, and the first 2 When the variable display of the special symbol is executed, it is determined as a small hit with a probability of about 1/7.

If it is determined to be a small hit (Y in step 090IWS69), the CPU 103 sets a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit (step 090IWS70). Then, the CPU 103 determines the type (small hit A, small hit B, small hit C) corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the hit type determination random number stored in the random number buffer area as the small hit type (step). 090IWS71). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the hit type determination random number extracted in the start winning determination process (step 090IWS101) and stored in advance in the second hold storage buffer, and determines the small hit type. Further, the CPU 103 sets the data indicating the determined small hit type in the small hit type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 090IWS72). Then, the process proceeds to step 090IWS73.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the time reduction counter for counting the number of executions of the variation display during the time reduction state is 0 (step 090IWS73). If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0 (that is, if it is in the time reduction state), the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the time reduction counter value (step 090IWS74), and the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction becomes 0. It is confirmed whether or not (step 090IWS75). If the value of the time saving counter after subtraction is 0 (that is, if the current fluctuation display is the time saving final fluctuation), the CPU 103 has decided to end the time saving state at the end of this fluctuation. The indicated time saving end determination flag is set (step 090IWS76).

In this example, even if the value of the time reduction counter is determined to be 0 in step 090IWS75, the time reduction flag is maintained and the time reduction state is continued only by setting the time reduction end determination flag at this stage. Then, the time saving flag is reset at the timing when the symbol is stopped, and the time saving state is ended (see step 090IWS138c described later). In the case of a big hit, only the time saving flag is set at the end of the big hit, and the time saving number counter is not set. Therefore, in this case, the time saving end determination flag is not set, and the time saving flag is reset at the next big hit (see step 090IWS134). If a big hit or a small hit occurs during the time reduction after the small hit ends, the time reduction flag and the time reduction count counter are reset (see step 090IWS134, 139a).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step 090IWS111) (step 090IWS77).

In this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the small hit determination process itself in step 090IWS68 is executed, but the probability of determining the small hit is 0%. However, it may be configured not to execute the small hit determination process itself in step 090IWS68. With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the need to provide the small hit determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8-4 (B).

Further, for example, even when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it may be configured so that it may be determined as a small hit with an extremely low probability.

In this example, the small hit determination is performed after the big hit determination is performed, but the large hit determination may be performed after the small hit determination is performed. In this case, the small hit type may be determined following the small hit determination, or the small hit type may be determined after the large hit determination is completed.

Further, in this example, the hit type determination random number is common for the large hit and the small hit, but different determination random numbers may be used. Further, the small hit determination value may be divided into two or more ranges without providing a random number for determining the hit type, and it may be determined whether or not there is a time reduction. Further, the number of types of symbols may be one regardless of whether or not there is a reduction in time. In this case, it is easier to determine whether or not there is a time reduction by using the small hit determination value without using the hit type determination random number.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 8-14 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process (step 090IWS113) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol confirmation period timer (step 090IWS131), and confirms whether or not the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 090IWS132). ..

If the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after subtraction is not 0 (that is, if the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not ended), the CPU 103 ends the process. To do. In the CPU 103, if the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after subtraction is 0 (that is, if the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has ended), the jackpot flag is set. Check if it is set (step 090IWS133). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set and the time reduction counter for counting the number of executions of the variation display during the time reduction state if it is set. (Step 090 IWS134). Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the jackpot start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 090IWS135). Next, the CPU 103 sets a large winning opening pre-opening time timer for measuring the large winning opening pre-opening time (fanfare time) until the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the open state (step 090IWS136). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot start pre-processing (step 090IWS137).

If the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step 090IWS138). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 103, if set, sets a time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set, and a time saving number counter for counting the number of times the variation display is executed during the time saving state. Reset (step 090IWS139a). Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 090IWS139b). Next, the CPU 103 uses a special winning opening pre-opening time timer for measuring the special winning opening pre-opening time (fanfare time) until the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is controlled to the open state, according to the fanfare time of a small hit. Set the value (step 090IWS140). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing (step 090IWS114) (step 090IWS141).

If the small hit flag is not set (that is, if it is off), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving end determination flag is set (step 090IWS138a). If the time saving end determination flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 090IWS142. If the time saving end determination flag is set, the time saving end determination flag is reset (step 090IWS138b), and the time saving flag is reset (step 090IWS138c). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 090IWS110) (step 090IWS142).

(External output signal)
FIG. 8-15 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal output externally from the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIGS. 8-15, in this example, one big hit signal, two big hit signals, and a time saving signal are output as external output signals. Of these, the jackpot 1 signal is a signal that is output externally during the jackpot game. Further, the jackpot 2 signal is a signal that is output externally during the jackpot game and the time saving state. The time saving signal is a signal that is output externally during the time saving state.

In this example, in addition to the case where the game is shifted to the time saving state at the end of the big hit game, the time saving state signal may be output externally because the time saving state may be shifted to the small hit A or the small hit B. To. Here, conventionally, the time saving state was sometimes controlled after the end of the big hit game state, but it was not controlled to the time saving state after the end of the small hit game state. Therefore, if one jackpot signal and two jackpot signals are output externally, the number of jackpots and the number of time reductions can be accurately identified in an external device (such as a hall computer or a data lamp). However, in this example, the time reduction state may be controlled not only after the end of the big hit game state but also after the end of the small hit game state, so that the external device can accurately determine the number of time reductions with only one big hit signal and two big hit signals. There is a risk that you will not be able to count. Therefore, by outputting the time reduction signal as in this example, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the external device cannot accurately count the number of time reductions.

(Pre-processing for small hit opening)
FIG. 8-16 is a flowchart showing a small hit opening pre-processing (step 090IWS114) in the special symbol process processing. In the small hit opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the special winning opening pre-opening time timer has timed out (step 090IWS401). If the time timer before opening the special winning opening has not timed out (that is, the fanfare time has not elapsed), the process ends as it is.

If the time before opening the special winning opening time timer has timed out (that is, if the fanfare time has elapsed), the CPU 103 starts driving the solenoid 090IW83 and controls the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 to the open state (that is, if the fanfare time has elapsed). Step 090IWS402). The opening pattern differs between the case of small hit A or small hit B and the case of small hit C (see FIG. 8-6). Further, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the first opening time (0.05 seconds in this example) of the special winning opening in the opening time timer (step 090IWS403).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit opening process (step 090IWS115) (step 090IWS404).

(Processing during small hit opening)
FIG. 8-17 is a flowchart showing a small hit opening process (step 090IWS115) in the special symbol process process. In the small hit opening process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the special winning opening switch 090IW24 is turned on (step 090IWS421). If the special winning opening switch 090IW24 is in the ON state (that is, if the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening is detected), the CPU 103 issues a special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120. Control to transmit (step 090IWS422).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the V winning opening switch 090IW20a is turned on (step 090IWS423). If the V winning opening switch 090IW20a is in the ON state (that is, if the winning of the game ball to the V winning opening is detected), the CPU 103 issues a V winning opening winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120. Control to transmit (step 090IWS424). Further, the CPU 103 sets a V winning flag indicating that the V winning has been made (step 090IWS425).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the non-V winning opening switch 090IW20b is turned on (step 090IWS425a). If the non-V winning opening switch 090IW20b is in the ON state (that is, if it is detected that the game ball that has won the special winning opening has not passed through the V winning opening), the CPU 103 specifies the non-V winning opening. Control is performed to send a command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 090IWS425b). Further, the CPU 103 sets a non-V winning flag indicating that the game ball has not won in the V winning opening (step 090IWS425c).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the opening timing of the V winning opening opening / closing plate 090IW20 has come (step 090IWS426). When the opening timing of the V winning opening opening / closing plate 090IW20 is reached, the CPU 103 starts driving the solenoid 090IW84 and controls the V winning opening opening / closing plate 090IW20 to be in the open state (step 090IWS427).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the closing timing of the V winning opening opening / closing plate 090IW20 has come (step 090IWS428). When the closing timing of the V winning opening opening / closing plate 090IW20 is reached, the CPU 103 stops driving the solenoid 090IW84 and controls the V winning opening opening / closing plate 090IW20 to be in the closed state (step 090IWS429).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the special winning opening is 0 (step 090IWS430). If the value of the open time timer is not 0 (that is, if the special winning opening is being opened), the CPU 103 subtracts the value of the open time timer by 1 (step 090IWS431), and the value of the open time timer after the subtraction is set. It is confirmed whether or not it is 0 (step 090IWS432). If the value of the open time timer is 0, the CPU 103 stops driving the solenoid 090IW83 and controls the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 in the closed state (step 090IWS433). Further, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined closing time (a value corresponding to the interval time (step 090IWS434) in the closing time timer for measuring the closing time after opening the special winning opening, and ends the process.

If the opening time timer is 0 in step 090IWS430 (that is, if the special winning opening is closed), the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the closing time timer value (step 090IWS435), and the value of the closing time timer after the subtraction. It is confirmed whether or not is 0 (step 090IWS436). If the value of the closing time timer is 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not all the opening of the special winning openings has already been completed (step 090IWS437). In this example, if the special winning opening has already been opened four times, it is determined as Y in step 090IWS437, and the process proceeds to step 090IWS440.

If all the special winning openings have not been opened (that is, if the 2nd to 4th opening remains), the CPU 103 starts driving the solenoid 090IW83 and opens the special variable winning ball device 090IW17. (Step 090 IWS438). Further, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the opening time (0.05 seconds in this example) in the opening time timer (step 090IWS439). Then, the process ends.

If all the special winning openings have been opened (Y in step 090IWS437), the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit closing post-processing (step 090IWS116) (step 090IWS440). ).

(Post-processing after closing small hits)
FIG. 8-18 is a flowchart showing the small hit closing post-processing (step 090IWS116) in the special symbol process processing. In the small hit closing post-processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit end display timer is set (step 090IWS451), and if the small hit end display timer is set, proceeds to step 090IWS453. When the small hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 displays on the small hit end display timer corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is performed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time). A value corresponding to the time is set (step 090IWS452), and the process ends.

In step 090IWS453, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the small hit end display timer. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 090IWS454). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the small hit end display time has elapsed, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the V winning flag is set (step 090IWS455). When the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time saving flag and the time saving number counter if it is set (step 090IWS456). Further, the CPU 103 resets the V winning flag (step 090IWS457). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the jackpot start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 090IWS458). Further, the CPU 103 sets a timer for the time before opening the big winning opening (step 090IWS459).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot start pre-processing (step 090IWS117) (step 090IWS460).

When it is confirmed that the V winning flag is not set in the process of step 090IWS456, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is a small hit A (step 090IWS461). In the case of small hit A, it is confirmed whether or not the non-V winning flag is set (step 090IWS461a). If the non-V winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 090IWS465. When the non-V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag (step 090IWS462). “10” is set in the time reduction counter (step 090IWS463). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the small hit end designation A command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 090IWS464). Then, the process proceeds to step 090IWS465.

Further, when the CPU 103 confirms that it is not a small hit A (N in step 090IWS461), it confirms whether or not it is a small hit B (step 090IWS467). In the case of small hit B, it is confirmed whether or not the non-V winning flag is set (step 090IWS467a). If the non-V winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 090IWS465. When the non-V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag (step 090IWS468). “5” is set in the time reduction counter (step 090IWS469). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the small hit end designation B command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 090IWS470). Then, the process proceeds to step 090IWS465.

Further, when the CPU 103 confirms that it is not the small hit B (N in step 090IWS467), the CPU 103 controls to transmit the small hit end designation C command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 090IWS471). Then, the process proceeds to step 090IWS465.

In step 090IWS465, the CPU 103 resets the small hit flag (step 090IWS465). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the small hit end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 090IWS462). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 090IWS110) (step 090IWS463).

A value is set in the timer that measures the ending period after the small hit is closed depending on whether it is the case of small hit A or B (with time reduction) or small hit C (without time reduction). Alternatively, the value is set so that the ending period in the case of B (with time reduction) is longer than the ending period in the case of small hit C (without time reduction).

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. 8-19 to 8-20 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 090IWS611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 090IWS612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 090IWS613). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step 090IWS614), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 090IWS615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 090IWS616).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step 090IWS617), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result specification command in the display result specification command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 090IWS618). ).

If the received effect control command is any of the symbol confirmation command (first symbol confirmation command, second symbol confirmation command) (step 090IWS619), the effect control CPU 120 responds to the received symbol confirmation command. Set the confirmation command reception flag (step 090IWS620). For example, when the first symbol confirmation command is received, the first confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second symbol confirmation command is received, the second confirmation command reception flag is set.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 090IWS621), the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 090IWS622). If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 090IWS623), the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 090IWS624).

If the received effect control command is a large winning opening winning designation command (step 090IWS625), the effect control CPU 120 sets the large winning opening winning designation command reception flag (step 090IWS626). If the received effect control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step 090IWS627), the effect control CPU 120 sets the special winning opening winning designation command reception flag (step 090IWS628). If the received effect control command is a V winning opening winning designation command (step 090IWS629), the effect control CPU 120 sets the V winning opening winning designation command reception flag (step 090IWS630). If the received effect control command is a non-V prize designation command (step 090IWS630a), the effect control CPU 120 sets the non-V prize designation command reception flag (step 090IWS630b).

If the received effect control command is one of the symbol specification commands (step 090IWS631), the effect control CPU 120 first transmits the received symbol specification command to the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM 122. It is stored in the storage area of (step 090IWS632).

If the received effect control command is one of the variable category commands (step 090IWS633), the effect control CPU 120 uses the received variable category command in the storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM 122. It is stored in the storage area where the latest symbol specification command is stored (step 090IWS634).

If the received effect control command is the first hold storage addition designation command (step 090IWS635), the effect control CPU 120 transmits the received first hold memory addition designation command to the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM 122. It is stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol specification command and variable category command are stored in the storage area of (step 090IWS636). Further, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the first reserved storage number stored in the RAM 122 (step 090IWS637). Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates the first hold storage display (display in which the first hold storage number can be specified) displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the first hold storage number after addition (display that can specify the first hold storage number). Step 090IWS638).

If the received effect control command is the second hold storage addition designation command (step 090IWS639), the effect control CPU 120 transmits the received second hold memory addition designation command to the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM 122. It is stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol specification command and variable category command are stored in the storage area of (step 090IWS640). Further, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the second reserved storage number stored in the RAM 122 (step 090IWS641). Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates the second hold storage display (display in which the second hold storage number can be specified) displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the second hold storage number after addition (display that can specify the second hold storage number). Step 090IWS642).

By executing the process of steps 090IWS631 to S642, in this example, when the start winning is generated, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the hold storage addition designation command (first hold storage) are executed in the start winning command storage area. Addition designation command, second hold storage addition designation command) are stored in association with each other.

The first start winning command storage area corresponding to the first hold storage and the second start winning command storage area corresponding to the second hold storage may be separately provided. Then, in this case, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the first hold storage addition designation command are stored in association with each other in the first start winning command storage area, and the symbol designation is performed in the second start winning command storage area. The command, the variable category command, and the second hold storage addition specification command may be configured to be stored in association with each other.

If the received effect control command is the first hold storage subtraction designation command (step 090IWS643), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the first hold storage number stored in the RAM 122 (step 090IWS644). Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates the first hold storage display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the first hold storage number after subtraction (step 090IWS645).

If the received effect control command is the second hold storage subtraction designation command (step 090IWS646), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the second hold storage number stored in the RAM 122 (step 090IWS647). Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates the second hold storage display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the second hold storage number after subtraction (step 090IWS648).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 executes a process of storing the received effect control command or setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 090IWS649). ). For example, if the received command is a time-saving background designation command, the image display device 5 displays a background image according to the time-saving state and sets a time-saving state flag indicating that the time-saving state is in effect. Further, for example, if the received command is a normal background designation command, the image display device 5 displays a background image according to the normal state, and if it is set, the time saving state flag is reset. Then, the process proceeds to step 090IWS611.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 8-21 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 090IWS801). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays a decorative symbol display result (stop) according to the variation pattern command read in step 090IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command). The symbol) is determined (step 090IWS802). That is, by executing the process of step 090IWS802 by the effect control CPU 120, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the decorative symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. When the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120 has a chance eye symbol (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-ream in step 090IWS802. , A combination of a jackpot symbol that does not reach but one symbol is out of alignment) is also determined. The effect control CPU 120 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step 090IWS802, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. ..

In step 090IWS802, when the received display result specification command indicates "big hit" or "small hit", the effect control CPU 120 has three symbols with the same stop symbol. Determine the combination of decorative symbols (big hit / small hit symbol). Then, in the case of "off", a combination of decorative patterns other than the above is determined. However, when accompanied by a reach effect, a combination of decorative symbols in which the two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. Further, the combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the image display device 5 is the "stop symbol" of the decorative symbol.

In this example, the case where the combination of the decorative symbols in which the three symbols are aligned with the same symbol is fixedly displayed in both the case of the big hit and the case of the small hit is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to confirm and display different combinations of decorative symbols in the case of a big hit and the case of a small hit. In this case, for example, in the case of a big hit, a combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbol) in which three symbols are aligned with the same symbol is confirmed and displayed, while in the case of a small hit, a combination of decorative symbols such as "135" is displayed. (Small hit symbol) may be configured to be fixedly displayed.

The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other to generate a stop symbol for the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

As for the decorative symbols, the stop symbol (a combination of symbols with the same symbol on the left, middle, and right) reminiscent of a jackpot is called a jackpot symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that reminds us of an outlier is called an outlier symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a normal process table according to the fluctuation pattern (step 090IWS803). Then, the process proceeds to step 090IWS814.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the process table selected in step 090IWS803 (step 090IWS804).

The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (effect component) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of a collection of a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of the fluctuation is set. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display control to display the decorative symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. In addition, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

In the process table used when executing the effect control for the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbol to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the image for displaying the symbol is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the pseudo-ream, and the temporary stop symbol in the sliding effect. You may.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 090IWS805). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (phone number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In this feature unit 090IW, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one, while the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step 090IWS806). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the look-ahead advance notice effect is determined (see step 090IWS304 in FIG. 8-25) (step 090IWS807a). When it is decided to execute the look-ahead effect, the hold display of the notice target is changed to a special mode different from the normal mode (step 090IWS807b). If it is not decided to execute the look-ahead effect, the process proceeds to step 090IWS808.

In step 090IWS808, the start winning command (design designation command, variable category command, and hold storage number addition designation command (first hold storage number addition) stored in the first storage area of the start winning command storage area The designated command and the second hold storage number addition designated command) are deleted, and the contents of the command storage area at the time of starting winning are shifted (step 090IWS808).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (step 090IWS809).

(Variable display during production processing)
FIG. 8-22 is a flowchart showing the effect processing during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 090IWS841) and 1 subtracts the variable time timer value (step 090IWS842). When the process timer times out (step 090IWS843), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 090IWS844). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step 090IWS845).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variation display being executed is any of the variation patterns PA1-2, PA1-4, PA1-6, PA2-2, PC1-4 to PC1-6. (Step 090IWS846). If it is not any of the fluctuation patterns PA1-2, PA1-4, PA1-6, PA2-2, PC1-4 to PC1-6, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display during execution is the fluctuation patterns PA3-2, PA3-4. , PB3-2, PD3-4 to PD3-6, or not (step 090IWS852). Whether or not these fluctuation patterns are used can be determined, for example, by checking the fluctuation pattern commands stored in the fluctuation pattern command storage area. In the above case, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the effect switching timing (step 090IWS847). Whether or not it is the switching timing of the effect is determined by, for example, checking the value of the fluctuation time timer set in step 090IWS816 of the variable display start setting process, and setting the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation display to 15 seconds. It can be determined by confirming whether or not it has passed.

If it is the time to switch the effect, the effect control CPU 120 switches to the process data for the development effect (step 090IWS849). Next, the effect control CPU 120 restarts the process timer (step 090IWS857). Then, the process proceeds to step 090IWS864.

If the fluctuation patterns are not PC1-4 to PC1-9 in step 090IWS846, the fluctuation patterns PD3-4 to PD3-9 are not in step 090IWS852, or if the production switching timing is not set in step 090IWS847, the process proceeds to step 090IWS864. To do.

Then, if the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step 090IWS864), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 090IWS865).

(Waiting processing per special figure)
8-23 and 8-24 are flowcharts showing a special figure hit waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the jackpot stop flag is set (step 090IWS871). The jackpot stop flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot symbol has already been derived and displayed but before the jackpot start designation command is received, and is set in step 090IWS875 described later. If the jackpot stop flag is set, the process proceeds to step 090IWS876.

If the big hit stop flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit stop flag is set (step 090IWS872). The small hit stop flag is a flag indicating that the small hit symbol has already been derived and displayed but before the small hit start designation command is received, and is set in step 090IWS883 described later. If the small hit stop flag is set, the process proceeds to step 090IWS885.

If the small hit stop flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 controls to stop and display the determined stop symbols (missing symbol, big hit symbol, small hit symbol) (step 090IWS873).

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 090IWS873 (Y in step 090IWS874), the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot stop flag (step 090IWS875). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received (step 090IWS876). Whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the jackpot start designation command reception flag (see step 090IWS622) is set. If the jackpot start specification command has not been received, the process ends as it is.

If the jackpot start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the jackpot stop flag (step 090IWS877). Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the effect during the big hit (step 090IWS878). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 090IWS879), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step 090IWS880).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during the jackpot (step 090IWS881).

Unless the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 090IWS873 (N in step 090IWS874), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 090IWS882 (step 090IWS882). .. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 090IWS882 (Y in step 090IWS882), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit stop flag (step 090IWS883). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received (step 090IWS885). Whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received can be determined, for example, by confirming in the command analysis process whether or not a flag indicating that the small hit start designation command has been received is set. If the small hit start specification command has not been received, the process ends as it is.

If the small hit start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the small hit stop flag (step 090IWS886). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is a small hit A or a small hit B (with a time reduction) (step 090IWS887a). In the case of a small hit A or a small hit B, the process table of the small hit notification effect for notifying the small hit and the right-handed instruction A for instructing the right-handed hit is selected (step 090IWS887b). If it is not a small hit A or a small hit B, that is, if it is a small hit C (no time reduction), a V winning promotion effect for promoting the winning of a game ball to the V winning opening and a right-handing instruction B for instructing a right-handed hit Process data of (step 090IWS887b). The right-handed instruction A and the right-handed instruction B are different in mode. Further, the right-handed instruction is different from the right-handed instruction C in the time saving state. For example, as a difference in mode, the size, position, and content of the right-handed image are different.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 090IWS888), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step 090IWS889). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a small hit effect period measurement timer for measuring the effect period during the small hit game (step 090IWS890).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process (step 090IWS891).

In this example, since the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is controlled to be in the open state during the small hit game, the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is opened as the small hit medium effect in the small hit medium effect processing. The production is executed.

When it is determined that neither the big hit nor the small hit is performed (N in step 090IWS882), that is, when it is determined that the hit is off, the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the effect control process flag. The value is updated according to the display start waiting process (step S170) (step 090IWS895).

(Read-ahead notice setting process)
FIG. 8-25 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the read-ahead notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not a new command at the time of starting winning is received (step 090IWS301). Whether or not a new start winning command has been received can be determined by, for example, a new symbol designation command, a variable category command, or a start winning designation command (first start winning designation command, first) in the start winning command storage area. 2 It can be determined by confirming whether or not the start prize designation command) and the total hold storage number designation command are stored. If a new start winning command has not been received, the process ends.

If a new start winning command is received (Y in step 090IWS301), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is in the normal state (step 090IWS301a). If it is not in the normal state, the process ends.

In the normal state, it is confirmed whether or not the total number of pending storages is 2 or more (step 090IWS302). Whether or not the total number of reserved storages is 2 or more can be determined, for example, by checking the total number of reserved storages stored in the total number of reserved storages storage area. If the total number of pending storage is not 2 or more, the process ends.

If the total number of pending memories is 2 or more (Y in step 090IWS302), does the effect control CPU 120 have a pending memory that is a big hit or a small hit in the reserved memories up to one before the reserved memory to be notified? Check whether or not (step 090IWS302a). Then, when the effect control CPU 120 has a hold memory that is a big hit or a small hit in the hold memory immediately before the hold memory to be notified, the look-ahead notice effect determination table for limiting the look-ahead notice (FIG. 8). -28 (J)) is selected (step 090IWS304a). Further, the effect control CPU 120 is the latest stored in the start winning command storage area when there is no hold memory that is a big hit or a small hit in the hold memory immediately before the hold memory to be notified. As a table for reading the variable category command and determining the presence / absence and type of the look-ahead notice effect, the read-ahead notice effect determination table corresponding to the read variable category command is selected (step 090IWS303).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the selected look-ahead advance notice effect determination table, and determines the presence / absence and type of the look-ahead advance notice effect (step 090IWS304).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it has been decided to execute the look-ahead advance notice effect (step 090 IWS305). If it is decided not to execute the look-ahead notice effect, the process ends. When it is decided to execute the look-ahead notice effect, the effect control CPU 120 associates the determined type of the look-ahead notice effect with the hold storage to be notified, and the look-ahead notice effect storage area formed in the RAM. Is stored in (step 090IWS306).

(Pre-reading notice production decision table)
8-26 to 8-28 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the look-ahead notice effect determination table.

Of these, FIG. 8-26 (A) shows a specific example of the look-ahead notice effect determination table selected when the determination result of the variation category indicated by the variation category command is out of reach. Further, FIG. 8-26 (B) shows a specific example of the look-ahead notice effect determination table selected when the determination result of the variation category indicated by the variation category command is out of the normal reach. Further, FIG. 8-26 (C) shows a specific example of the look-ahead advance notice effect determination table selected when the determination result of the variation category indicated by the variation category command is out of the normal reach.

Further, FIG. 8-27 (D) shows a specific example of the look-ahead notice effect determination table selected when the determination result of the variation category indicated by the variation category command is a normal reach jackpot. FIG. 8-27 (E) shows a specific example of the look-ahead notice effect determination table selected when the determination result of the variation category indicated by the variation category command is a super reach jackpot.

Further, FIG. 8-28 (F) shows a specific pre-reading advance notice effect determination table selected when the determination result of the variation category indicated by the variation category command is a normal reach small hit (that is, a small hit C). An example is shown. Further, FIG. 8-28 (G) shows the look-ahead advance notice effect determination table selected when the determination result of the variation category indicated by the variation category command is a super reach small hit (that is, a small hit C). A concrete example is shown. Further, FIG. 8-28 (H) shows a look-ahead selected when the determination result of the variable category indicated by the variable category command is a non-reach development small hit (that is, a small hit A or a small hit B). A specific example of the advance notice production decision table is shown. Further, FIG. 8-28 (I) shows a look-ahead notice selected when the determination result of the variable category indicated by the variable category command is a normal reach development small hit (that is, a small hit A or a small hit B). A specific example of the production decision table is shown. Further, FIG. 8-28 (J) shows a specific example of the pre-reading advance notice effect determination table for pre-reading restriction, which is selected when there is a big hit or a small hit in the hold memory up to the previous one. ..

In this example, the mode (color) of the hold display is white in the normal mode. Then, when the look-ahead notice effect is executed, it changes to any of blue, green, red, and gold as a special mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (A), in the case of non-reach out-of-reach including the case of executing the development effect, the ratio of the color of the hold display remaining white is 100%, and other cases. Judgment values are assigned so that the color selection ratio is 0%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (B), when the normal reach is out of the range including the case of executing the development effect, the ratio of the color of the hold display remaining white is 80%, and blue is selected. Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio is 15%, the selection ratio of green is 5%, and the selection ratio of other colors is 0%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (C), when the super reach is out of alignment, the ratio of the color of the hold display remaining white is 60%, the ratio of blue selection is 20%, and the ratio of green is green. Judgment values are assigned so that the selection ratio is 10%, the selection ratio of red is 4%, and the selection ratio of gold is 1%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-27 (D), in the case of a normal reach jackpot, the ratio of the color of the hold display remaining white is 35%, the selection ratio of blue is 1%, and the selection of green is selected. Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio is 150%, the selection ratio of red is 40%, and the selection ratio of gold is 9%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-27 (E), in the case of a super reach jackpot, the ratio of the color of the hold display remaining white is 10%, the selection ratio of blue is 0%, and the ratio of green is green. Judgment values are assigned so that the selection ratio is 20%, the selection ratio of red is 60%, and the selection ratio of gold is 10%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-28 (F), in the case of a normal reach small hit (that is, in the case of a small hit C), the ratio of the color of the hold display remaining white is 60%. Judgment values are assigned so that the blue selection ratio is 1%, the green selection ratio is 10%, the red selection ratio is 19%, and the gold selection ratio is 0%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-28 (G), in the case of a super reach small hit (that is, in the case of a small hit C), the rate at which the color of the hold display remains white is 60%. , The determination value is assigned so that the selection ratio of blue is 0%, the selection ratio of green is 15%, the selection ratio of red is 25%, and the selection ratio of gold is 0%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-28 (H), in the case of a non-reach development small hit (that is, in the case of a small hit A or a small hit B), the rate at which the color of the hold display remains white. Is 80%, and the determination values are assigned so that the blue selection ratio is 5%, the green selection ratio is 15%, the red selection ratio is 0%, and the gold selection ratio is 0%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-28 (I), in the case of a normal reach development small hit (that is, in the case of a small hit A or a small hit B), the rate at which the color of the hold display remains white is Judgment values are assigned so that the selection ratio of blue is 10%, the selection ratio of green is 20%, the selection ratio of red is 0%, and the selection ratio of gold is 0%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-28 (J), when the look-ahead is restricted, the ratio of the color of the hold display remaining white is 80%, the selection ratio of blue is 20%, and the selection of green is selected. Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio is 0%, the selection ratio of red is 0%, and the selection ratio of gold is 0%.

As described above, in this example, the pre-reading determination is performed at the time of the start winning, and the pre-reading effect can be executed based on the determination result of the pre-reading determination. Then, the look-ahead effect is executed by changing the color of the hold display. Then, comparing FIGS. 8-28 (F) to (G) with FIGS. 8-28 (H) to (J), there are cases where the display result of small hit A or small hit B is derived and displayed, and small. The rate at which the look-ahead notice effect is executed differs depending on whether the display result of winning C is derived and displayed. Then, when any of the display results such as the big hit, the small hit A, the small hit B, and the small hit C is derived and displayed in the hold memory up to the previous one, FIG. 8-28 By selecting the table (J), the execution of the look-ahead notice effect for the hold memory after the hold memory is restricted (see step 090IWS304a in FIG. 8-25). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-28 (J), the look-ahead notice effect is restricted by making it easier to select blue or no execution, which has a low expectation of big hit. Therefore, when the display results of the small hit A, the small hit B, and the small hit C are derived and displayed, the effect can be suitably executed. That is, it is possible to prevent a feeling of strangeness from occurring due to a difference in the fluctuation pattern selected at the time of starting prize and the fluctuation pattern selected after a big hit or a small hit due to changes in the state at the time of starting winning and at the time of fluctuation, and appropriately execute the look-ahead effect. it can.

It is possible to configure the pre-reading notice to be restricted when the fluctuation pattern command or the display result command is missed. Also in this case, for example, it is possible to select a look-ahead notice effect having the lowest expectation of a big hit among the display results that can be specified from the fluctuation pattern. For example, the display result that can be specified in the case of normal reach is (1) a display result that can almost certainly win the V winning opening and develops into a big hit as a small hit, and (2) a small hit and the time reduction of 100 times is determined. If the display result is (3) a small hit, but it can almost certainly be one of the display results that does not win the V winning opening and there is no time saving, the look-ahead notice effect corresponding to (3) is executed. ..

Further, in this example, as shown in steps 090IWS303 to 090IWS304 in FIGS. 8-25 and 8-28 (D) to (E), whether or not a display result that is a big hit is derived and displayed in the look-ahead determination. Also judge. Then, the pre-reading advance notice effect can be executed based on the determination result of whether or not the display result that becomes a big hit is derived and displayed. In this case, when the hold memory in which the display result that becomes a big hit is derived and displayed is stored, by selecting the table of FIG. 8-28 (J), the look-ahead notice effect for the hold memory after the hold memory is produced. The restriction mode of the look-ahead notice effect is common between the case where the execution is restricted and the display result of the small hit A or the small hit B is derived and displayed and the case where the display result of the big hit is derived and displayed (FIG. 8). See step 090IWS304a in -25). Therefore, it is possible to avoid inconsistency between the pre-reading notice effect and the effect after the big hit game state or the time saving state, so that the pre-reading notice effect can be preferably executed.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-27 (D) to 8-28 (J), when the display result of any of the small hit A, the small hit B, and the small hit C is derived and displayed. , It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect that is common to when the display result that becomes a big hit is derived and displayed (for example, it can change to blue or green in any case). Then, when the display result of any of the small hit A, the small hit B, and the small hit C is derived and displayed, the look-ahead effect in which the expected degree of the derived display of the large hit display result is equal to or higher than the specific value is not executed. .. That is, it does not change to gold, which has the highest expectation of big hits. Therefore, since the player does not have excessive expectations, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered when the display result that is a small hit is derived and displayed.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-28 (F) to (J), when the display result of the small hit A or the small hit B is derived and displayed, and when the display result of the small hit C is derived and displayed. The rate at which the pre-reading notice effect whose expected value is equal to or greater than the predetermined value is executed differs depending on when it is displayed. Specifically, when the display result of small hit A or small hit B is derived and displayed, the hold display does not change to red, but when the display result of small hit C is derived and displayed, the hold display is red. Can change to. In addition, red has a jackpot expected value higher than a predetermined value higher than green. Therefore, since the player does not have excessive expectations, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered when the display result that is a small hit is derived and displayed.

Further, what can be said from FIGS. 8-26 to 8-28 is a color that fuels the expectation of a big hit because gold is confirmed as a big hit. In addition, red has a higher expectation of big hit than blue and green, and further, it does not turn red in the case of small hit C (no time reduction) or when it is missed, but it is red in the case of small hit A or small hit B (with time reduction). Can be. Then, when the small hit A or the small hit B is executed, the development effect is executed. Therefore, when the hold display turns red due to the look-ahead notice and the development effect is executed, it is confirmed that the time saving state is controlled. I can say. As a result, both the hold display and the fluctuation pattern can be focused on, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced. In addition, it may be configured so that the development fanning effect suggesting that the development fanning effect is executed can be executed, and the development is confirmed when the development fanning effect is executed. Further, the case of small hit A or small hit B (with time reduction) is more likely to turn green than the case of small hit C (without time reduction). That is, when it turns green, the development effect is likely to be executed. In addition, red is a color with a higher expectation of big hits than blue and green.

The look-ahead notice effect is not limited to the change in the color of the hold display, and may be in another mode. For example, when announcing that a small hit with a short time has occurred, it is possible to display a background such as a special zone background or to make a special character appear.

(Production example)
Next, a specific example of the effect of the small hit A or the small hit B (with time reduction) and the small hit C (without time reduction) will be described.

FIGS. 8-29 to 8-31 show the transition of the screen when the small hit A or the small hit B (with time reduction) is reached in the normal state (low probability / low base state).

As shown in FIG. 8-29 (A), when controlled to the normal state (low probability / low base state), the image display device 5 corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the upper left. The small symbol 090IW100 on the left, middle, and right is displayed. In this example, since the starting prize is almost generated in the first starting winning opening in the normal state, the game ball wins in the first starting winning opening and the variable display of the small symbol 090IW100 is started. .. Then, in conjunction with the fluctuation display of the small symbol 090IW100, the decorative symbol 090IW101 on the left, middle, and right, which is larger than the small symbol 090IW100, starts to fluctuate at the center of the screen.

In this example, for example, three hold displays 090IW112 for the first special symbol are displayed. The hold display is white in the normal state, but by changing it to any of blue, green, red, and gold, it is possible to execute a look-ahead notice effect of becoming a big hit or a small hit. The jackpot expectations are in the order of gold, red, green, and blue (ie, gold is the highest and blue is the lowest). Also, when it is a small hit, it does not change to gold, but it can change to red, green, and blue. Then, when it turns red, there is no time saving, but the expectation of a small hit that makes it easy to win a V is high. Further, in this example, since the reserved memory related to the change in the figure is a small hit, the pre-reading notice for the reserved memory after the reserved memory related to the change is limited. Therefore, the hold display 090IW112 can change to blue even when the look-ahead notice effect is executed, but does not change to green, red, or gold.

As shown in FIGS. 8-29 (B) and (C), it is assumed that the left and right decorative symbols 090IW101 are stopped and the jackpot symbol reaches the normal reach. At this time, the small symbol 090IW100 is still displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIG. 8-29 (D), it is assumed that the decorative symbol 090IW101 inside is stopped and the out-of-order symbol is stopped in the state of FIG. 8-28 (C). At this time, the decorative symbol 090IW101 is not in a completely stopped state, but in a temporarily stopped state accompanied by shaking. The small symbol 090IW100 is still displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIG. 8-29 (E), the decorative symbol 090IW101 temporarily stopped in the state of FIG. 8-28 (D) is temporarily erased, and the development effect is executed. In this example, the character 090IW102, which suggests that the time reduction state is controlled, is displayed in the center of the screen larger than the small symbol 090IW100. The small symbol 090IW100 is still displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIG. 8-29 (F), after the development effect shown in FIG. 8-29 (E) is executed, the temporarily stopped decorative symbol 090IW101 is displayed in a variable manner again. At this time, the small symbol 090IW100 is still displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIGS. 8-29 (G) and (H), it is assumed that the left and right decorative symbols 090IW101 are stopped and the small hit A or the small hit B is reached. At this time, the small symbol 090IW100 is still displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIG. 8-30 (I), it is assumed that the remaining decorative symbol 090IW101 is stopped and the small hit symbol "135" of the small hit A or the small hit B is stopped. At this time, the small symbol 090IW100 also stops at "135" at the same time.

As shown in FIG. 8-30 (J), when the small hit symbol "135" is stopped in the small symbol 090IW100 and the decorative symbol 090IW101, the small hit is in the time before opening before the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is opened. The character 090IW103, which suggests that is started, is displayed in the center of the screen larger than the small symbol 090IW100.

As shown in FIG. 8-30 (K), when the small hit game is started, the background A during the small hit is displayed, and the character "small hit in progress" is displayed to notify that the small hit game is in progress. 090IW105 is displayed. Further, in the case of the small hit A or the small hit B, it is difficult to win the game ball in the V winning opening, and it is difficult to generate the big hit. For this reason, it is more disappointing for the player than the small hit C, which tends to generate a big hit, but in the case of the small hit A or the small hit B, V is not won and the time is controlled to be shortened. Therefore, in order to allow the game ball to enter the special variable winning ball device 090IW17, the right-handed instruction display (right-handed instruction A) 090IW106 is displayed, and the player is hit right-handed so as not to incite disappointment. The instruction display (right-handed instruction A) 090IW106 is displayed in a small and inconspicuous manner at the lower right of the screen. The right-handed instruction display 090IW106 is composed of the characters "right-handed" and one arrow pointing to the right. In order to make the right-handed instruction display 090IW106 less noticeable, the small hit medium background A is a flashy background that attracts the player's interest, such as the appearance of a character.

As shown in FIG. 8-30 (L), when the small hit game state ends without winning the V winning opening, the end screen is displayed in the ending period of the small hit. For example, the background and characters corresponding to the end screen are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 8-30 (M), after the end screen of the small hit game is displayed, the start screen in the time saving state is displayed. For example, an image indicating that the time saving state is started and the number of fluctuations in the time saving state are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 8-30 (N), when the display of the start screen of the time saving state is finished, the variable display of the small symbol 090IW100 and the decorative symbol 090IW101 on the left, middle, and right is started, and the control of the time saving state is started. When the control of the time saving state is started, the background during the time saving state is displayed, and the remaining number of fluctuations 090IW107 in the time saving state is displayed on the upper right of the screen. Further, during the time saving state, the right-handed instruction display (right-handed instruction C) 090IW108 is displayed at the upper part of the screen in order to allow the game ball to enter toward the passing gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B. The right-handed instruction display 090IW108 in the time-saving state is composed of the characters "right-handed" and two arrows pointing to the right. The right-handed instruction display 090IW108 is larger than the right-handed instruction display 090IW106, and the display position is also different.

As shown in FIGS. 8-30 (O) and 8-31 (P) (Q), it is assumed that the decorative symbol 090IW101 is stopped, the small symbol 090IW100 is stopped, and the out-of-order symbol is stopped.

As shown in FIG. 8-31 (R), when the next fluctuation is started and the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol 090IW101 and the small symbol 090IW100 is started, the remaining number of fluctuations 090IW107 is subtracted. After that, the same control is performed until the time saving state ends.

8-32 to 8-33 show the transition of the screen when the small hit C (no time reduction) occurs in the normal state (low probability / low base state).

As shown in FIG. 8-32 (A), when controlled to the normal state (low probability / low base state), the image display device 5 corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the upper left. The small symbol 090IW100 on the left, middle, and right is displayed. In this example, since the starting prize is almost generated in the first starting winning opening in the normal state, the game ball wins in the first starting winning opening and the variable display of the small symbol 090IW100 is started. .. Then, in conjunction with the fluctuation display of the small symbol 090IW100, the decorative symbol 090IW101 on the left, middle, and right, which is larger than the small symbol 090IW100, starts to fluctuate at the center of the screen.

As shown in FIGS. 8-32 (B), (C), and (D), it is assumed that the decorative symbol 090IW101 on the left, middle, and right stops, and the small hit symbol "357" of the small hit C stops. At this time, the small symbol 090IW100 also stops at "357" at the same time.

As shown in FIG. 8-32 (E), when the small hit symbol "357" is stopped in the small symbol 090IW100 and the decorative symbol 090IW101, the small hit is in the time before opening before the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is opened. The character 090IW103, which suggests that is started, is displayed in the center of the screen larger than the small symbol 090IW100.

As shown in FIG. 8-32 (F), when the small hit game is started, the background B during the small hit is displayed, and the game ball is launched aiming at the V winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 090IW17. The character 090IW109 "Aim for V!" Is displayed to notify the user. Further, in the case of the small hit C, the game ball is likely to win the V winning opening, and the big hit is likely to occur. For this reason, the player is pleased because a large amount of balls can be obtained. Therefore, in order to make the game ball enter toward the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 and generate a big hit, the right-handed instruction display (right-handed instruction B) 090IW110 is displayed, and the right-handed instruction display 090IW110 is greatly conspicuous in the center of the screen. Display in mode. The right-handed instruction display 090IW110 is composed of the characters "right-handed" and three right-pointing arrows. In order to make the right-handed instruction display 090IW107 more conspicuous, the small hit medium background B has a simple screen without characters or the like appearing, and is a sober background that does not attract the interest of the player. The right-handed instruction display 090IW110 is larger than the right-handed instruction display 090IW106 in the small hit A or the small hit B and the right-handed instruction display 090IW108 in the short time, and the display positions are also different.

As described above, the right-handed instruction display 090IW106 in the small hit A or the small hit B, the right-handed instruction display 090IW110 in the small hit C, and the right-handed instruction display 090IW108 in the time saving are the sizes, display positions, and display modes ( The number of arrows) is different.

As shown in FIG. 8-32 (G), when the V winning opening is won and the small hit game state ends, it is suggested that a winning is generated at the V winning opening and a big hit is generated during the ending period of the small hit. The letter "V" 090IW104 is displayed in the center of the screen.

As shown in FIG. 8-33 (H), the character 090IW111 suggesting that the jackpot game (second round) is started is displayed in the center of the screen larger than the small symbol 090IW100.

As shown in FIG. 8-33 (I), when the big hit game (second round) is started, the background during the big hit is displayed, and the game is performed in the big hit game state. The same applies to the third and fourth rounds. In this example, an example in which a small hit C is obtained during the normal state is described, but even if a small hit C is obtained during the time saving state, the same effect as described above is performed during the small hit game, and the small hit is performed. A larger right-handed instruction is displayed than in the case of hit A or small hit B. Further, the size of the right-handed instruction display may be different by executing different effects depending on whether the small hit C is obtained in the normal state or the small hit C is obtained in the time saving state.

As described above, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is opened depending on whether the display result of the small hit A or the small hit B is derived and displayed and the display result of the small hit C is derived and displayed. The effect performed when controlled by the state is different. Specifically, in the case of small hit A or small hit B, the character 090IW105 "in small hit" is displayed to notify that the small hit game is in progress during the small hit game (FIG. 8-30 (FIG. 8-30 (FIG. 8-30)). K)), the character 090IW109 "Aim for V!" Is displayed to notify that the game ball is launched aiming at the V winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 (FIG. 8-32 (F)). Therefore, when the display result that is a small hit is derived and displayed, the effect can be suitably executed.

Further, in this example, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided so that a game ball passing through a right-handed path through which the game ball can flow down by hitting the game ball on the right side of the game area can enter. Then, the launch promotion display regarding the launch promotion of the game ball to the right-handed path is performed, and when the display result of the small hit A or the small hit B is derived and displayed, and the display result of the small hit C is derived and displayed. The launch promotion display is performed in a different manner from time to time. Specifically, unlike the small hits A and B, the small hit C is likely to generate a large hit. Therefore, when the small hit A or B is used, the right-handed instruction display 090IW106 (FIG. 8-30 (K)). (See) is displayed, and when the small hit is C, the right-handed instruction display 090IW110 (see FIG. 8-32 (F)) is displayed. Therefore, the game can be suitably advanced.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-29 (E), it is possible to execute an effect suggesting that the time is controlled as a notice effect of a small hit. That is, the character 090IW102 of "time reduction?" Is displayed, which suggests that the development effect is executed and controlled to the time reduction state. Therefore, since the variation of the look-ahead notice effect increases, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Modification example)
Next, a modified example of the effect executed in the feature unit 090IW will be described. Hereinafter, in a modified example, in FIG. 8-6, a special variable winning prize is obtained when the display result of the small hit A or the small hit B is derived and displayed, and when the display result of the small hit C is derived and displayed. By making the opening pattern of the ball device 090IW17 different, the ease of winning the game ball into the V winning opening is made different, and an example of controlling whether or not to control the time saving state is given, but in the modified example, it is small. The special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is opened by the same pattern when the display result of hit A or small hit B is derived and displayed and when the display result of small hit C is derived and displayed, but the special variable By making the time before opening of the winning ball device 090IW17 different, the ease of winning a game ball into the V winning opening is made different, and it is controlled whether or not the time is controlled to be shortened. The description of the parts common to those in FIGS. 8-6 will be omitted.

FIG. 8-34 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of the small hit game. The operation of the V winning opening opening / closing plate 090IW20 is common to the case of small hit A or small hit B (with time reduction) and the case of small hit C (without time reduction).

As shown in FIG. 8-34 (A), in the case of small hit A or B (with time reduction), after the small hit game is started at timing S1, when the pre-opening period t1 (fanfare time) elapses, at timing S2. The special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is controlled to the open state. By setting the pre-opening period t1 in this way, the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is controlled to the open state when the V winning opening opening / closing plate 090IW20 is controlled to the closed state. Then, after opening the special winning opening for 0.05 seconds, after a closing time of 1 second, the operation of opening the special winning opening for 0.05 seconds is repeated, so that the special winning opening is opened 10 times with one small hit. Be released.

As shown in FIG. 8-33 (B), in the case of the small hit C (no time reduction), after the small hit game is started at the timing S1, the pre-opening period t2 (fanfare time) shorter than the pre-opening period t1 is set. After that, the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is controlled to the open state at the timing S2. By setting the pre-opening period t2 in this way, the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is controlled to the open state when the V winning opening opening / closing plate 090IW20 is controlled to the open state. Then, according to the same pattern as in FIG. 8-34 (A), the operation of opening the special winning opening for 0.05 seconds is repeated after a closing time of 1 second after opening the special winning opening for 0.05 seconds. One small hit opens the special winning opening 10 times.

As described above, in this example, the special variable winning ball has the same pattern when the display result of the small hit A or the small hit B is derived and displayed and when the display result of the small hit C is derived and displayed. The device 090IW17 can be controlled in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to preferably control whether or not to control the time saving state, and it is possible to prevent in advance from being detected in advance which small hit display result will be derived and displayed.

Further, in this example, the V winning opening opening / closing plate that performs a common operation when the display result of the small hit A or the small hit B is derived and displayed and when the display result of the small hit C is derived and displayed. The special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is controlled to be in the open state depending on whether the display result of the small hit A or the small hit B is derived and displayed and the display result of the small hit C is derived and displayed. The period until it is done is different. Therefore, it is possible to preferably control whether or not to control the time saving state.

(Other modified examples)
In this feature unit 090IW, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of small hits in which a game ball cannot be won in the V winning opening. Then, as multiple types of small hits, a small hit that shifts to a shorter time state when a game ball does not win in the V winning opening, and a small hit that wins in the special winning opening but plays in the V winning opening. A small hit that does not shift to the time saving state when the ball does not win is provided. Then, when a small hit shifts to a shorter time state when the special winning opening is won but the game ball does not win in the V winning opening, and when the special winning opening is won but the game ball does not win in the V winning opening. It is possible to configure it to perform a different effect with a small hit that does not shift to the time saving state. The effect may be different in either the variable state or the small hit game state, or both may be different.

Further, in this example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with the V winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 090IW17, a small hit with a time reduction or a small hit without a time reduction is generated, and a hold memory that becomes a small hit is included. In this case, an example of restricting the execution of the look-ahead effect was given, but a pachinko game in which the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is not provided and only the special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. When the machine 1 is configured to generate a small hit depending on the result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and includes a hold memory that is a small hit with a time reduction or a small hit without a time reduction. May be configured to limit the execution of the look-ahead effect. For example, it is possible to limit the execution of the look-ahead effect in a pachinko gaming machine having a small hit RUSH (high probability / low base state).

Further, in each of the above-mentioned feature portions and modifications, the mode in which the transition to the time saving state (high base state) is always made via the big hit state or the small hit state is illustrated, but the present invention exemplifies. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a time saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the time saving state (high base state) may be entered without operating the special variable winning ball device 7. ..

As the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be a part of the out-of-time symbols or a part of the small hit symbols.

In addition, when performing a lottery process related to the derivation display of the time-saving symbol, the lottery may be executed by using a dedicated random number for the time-saving symbol lottery in these lottery processes, or a lottery random number of a missed symbol or a big hit symbol. The lottery may be performed using other lottery random numbers such as the lottery random number of the above, the lottery random number of the small hit symbol, the random number for determining the big hit lottery, and the lottery random number of the fall lottery.

Further, these time-saving symbols may be a plurality of types of symbols, and may be used in combination with a combination of symbols displayed as other symbols, which are out-of-order symbols.

Further, in the case of drawing a time-saving symbol and the set value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol does not change according to the set value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol in all the set values. Is the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special figure and the second special figure.

In addition, regarding the timing of random number acquisition when drawing a lottery for time-saving symbols, regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used, the starting port (first starting winning opening, It may be at the time of winning the second start winning opening).

In addition, regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol is drawn, when using a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number), the lottery result by the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used as the winning value, and the small hit symbol is used for the time-saving symbol lottery. When a random number is used, a specific small hit symbol random number value can be used as the winning value, and when a random number for the fall lottery judgment value is used for the lottery of the time saving symbol, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. A lottery using the above, for example, a time saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the time saving symbol may be won when the game ball passes through the time saving area.

In addition, regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol lottery is performed, when the time-saving symbol lottery uses the missing symbol random number, the specific missing symbol random number value is used as the winning value, and when the jackpot symbol random number is used for the time-saving symbol lottery, it is specified. The jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, when these random values are used as winning values, performances other than the jackpot probability differ depending on the setting, so it is possible only if the set value cannot be changed.

Further, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the jackpot determination. In addition, the lottery of the time saving symbol is not executed in the time saving state (high base) or the high probability time regardless of the random number value used for the lottery, and is executed only in the low probability low base state. .. However, if the time saving symbol is derived and displayed in the state where the time saving state has already been set, even if the time saving number of times is reset or the lottery is not performed, it may be determined for each game machine.

Further, regarding the number of time reductions when the time reduction symbol is derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of time reductions according to the winning value (symbol) and the game state. In addition, the conditions for granting the time reduction can be made different for each time reduction symbol.

Further, when the number of time reductions differs depending on the time reduction symbol, the time reduction symbol distribution lottery can be changed between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

Further, even when the same time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time saving times given may be different depending on the game state at that time. However, it is necessary that the game state is predetermined.

In addition, the lottery result of "0 times of time saving" can be included as the lottery result of the time saving symbol in the low probability low base state.

Further, the time reduction end symbol derivation lottery (time reduction end lottery) may be executed, and the number of time reductions may be set to the number of times until the time reduction end symbol is derived and displayed after the time reduction start, or until the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. That is, in principle, the number of time reductions may not be set and may be unlimited.

Further, the number of time reductions and the granting condition may be different between the time reduction state controlled by the time reduction symbol and the time reduction state controlled by the occurrence of a big hit.

Further, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing of being controlled to the time-saving state is the time when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where the small hit symbol random number is used for the lottery of the time saving symbol, when the small hit is won and the time saving state is entered, the end time of the small hit operation is controlled to the time saving state.

Further, in the case of a lottery using the structure, the timing controlled to the time saving state is the timing at the end of the operation of the structure in the gaming state (for example, the small hit state) in which the structure is operated.

Further, in the case of a gaming machine (so-called specified number of probability change machines (ST machines)) that is controlled to a high probability low base state over a predetermined variable display number after a big hit, the high probability low base state is reached when the game hall is opened. Therefore, the high-probability low-base state may be controlled to a time-saving state after the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed and ended.

In addition, when the time saving limiter function is installed and the time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time saving limiter is updated.

Further, the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol may be set to a time different from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

In this example, when the number of times the symbol fluctuates in the normal state reaches a predetermined number of times, it can be configured to be controlled in a time-saving state (so-called ceiling). Specifically, a counter is provided to count the number of fluctuations until the time is reduced, and the counter starts counting when the RAM is initialized (when the clear switch is operated, when the setting is changed, etc.) or when the jackpot is completed. To do. Then, when the counted number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times, the time is controlled to be shortened. The counting method determines whether or not the number of fluctuations has reached a predetermined number by subtracting the value set in the counter for each fluctuation and determining whether or not the count value has become 0. Alternatively, the value of the counter may be added for each fluctuation to determine whether or not the number of fluctuations has reached a predetermined number of times. The predetermined number of times until the time is controlled to be shortened may be determined by lottery. As a result, it is not possible to know when the time is controlled to be shortened, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The predetermined number of times n, which is the number of fluctuations of the symbol until it is controlled to the time saving state, is, for example, when the denominator of the jackpot probability is P (for example, P = 319 when the jackpot probability is 1/319). It is possible to set 2.5P ≦ n ≦ 3.0P. Further, the predetermined number of times N, which is the number of fluctuations of the symbol until it is controlled to the time saving state, is, for example, when the denominator of the jackpot probability is P (for example, P = 319 when the jackpot probability is 1/319). It is possible to set 0.4P ≦ N ≦ 3.8P. Note that these are examples, and P is not limited to these ranges.

Further, the RAM initialization (when the clear switch is operated, the setting is changed, etc.) and the setting of the predetermined number of times P at the time of a big hit may inherit the number of times before the initialization. In this case, it can be expected that the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times P and is controlled in a time-saving state shortly after the start of the game, so that the operating rate of the pachinko gaming machine can be increased.
On the other hand, when the RAM is initialized (when the clear switch is operated, when the setting is changed, etc.) or when the jackpot is hit, the predetermined number of times P may not be inherited from the number before the initialization. In this case, any player can be allowed to play the game under fair conditions.

Further, when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number and is controlled to the time saving state, the time saving state may be terminated when the number of fluctuations reaches the upper limit number, or the time saving state may be continued until the next big hit. Good.

When the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number, the number of fluctuations may be counted again. In this configuration, for example, if an upper limit number of times in the time saving state is set and the upper limit number of times is made larger than the predetermined number of times until the time saving state is controlled, the count value reaches the predetermined number of times during the time saving state. Since the upper limit number of times is set again, it is possible to continue the time saving state until the next big hit while setting the upper limit number of times.

It is also possible not to count the number of fluctuations during the time saving state. In this case, when the upper limit of the time saving state is set, the time saving state ends when the number of fluctuations reaches the upper limit.

In addition, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the time saving state when the number of fluctuations in the normal state reaches the first number, and when the lottery is not won, the time is shortened when the number of fluctuations reaches the second number. It may be controlled to the state (so-called pattern of reaching the ceiling via a temporary ceiling).

If the feature unit IW090 is provided with a ceiling and is configured to control the time reduction state when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times, either small hit A or small hit B (with time reduction) can be obtained. The value of the counter is not reset and the count is continued. When the small hit is C (no time reduction), when the big hit does not occur, the value of the counter is not reset and the counting is continued. As a result, when the small hit A or the small hit B (with time reduction) is obtained, the count value may reach a predetermined number of times during the time reduction after the small hit game is completed, and the time reduction state may be extended. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the development after the small hit game is completed. In addition, even if the small hit C (no time reduction) occurs and the big hit does not occur, it may be controlled to the time reduction state immediately after the small hit game ends, so expectation for the development after the small hit game ends. Can have.

As described above, the feature unit 090IW discloses the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1A) to (means 6A).

(Means 1A)
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display and controlling to an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) based on the derivation display of a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol).
Step 090IWS462 and step 090IWS468 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 8-18, of a state control means (for example, as shown in FIG. The part to execute) and
It has a special area (for example, V winning opening) and is controlled into a first state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can easily enter and a second state (for example, a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter. With possible variable means (eg, special variable winning ball device 090IW17),
When a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed, the variable means can be controlled to the first state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-5, for game control. (Part of executing step S118 in the microcomputer 100),
The special display result is a first special display result (for example, a display result of small hit A or small hit B) and a second special display result (for example, small hit C) different from the first special display result. Display result), including
The state control means
In the normal state, when the first special display result (for example, a display result of small hit A or small hit B) is derived and displayed, the special state can be controlled (for example, shown in FIG. 8-18). (Part of executing step 090IWS462, step 090IWS468) in the game control microcomputer 100).
In the normal state, when the second special display result (for example, the display result of the small hit C) is derived and displayed, the special state is not controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-18, the game control When the value is N in step 090IWS467 in the microcomputer 100, the process of step 090IWS462 and step 090IWS468 is not executed).
A determination means for determining whether to derive and display the special display result (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, a portion for executing step 090IWS68 in the game control microcomputer 100) and
Prior to the determination of the determination means, the determination means for determining that the special display result is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-11, step 090IWS1216 and step 090IWS1226 in the game control microcomputer 100 are executed. Part) and
Based on the determination result of the determination means, the look-ahead advance notice effect execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-21, the portion that executes step 090IWS807 in the effect control CPU 120) and
Further provided with a hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage buffer and a second hold storage buffer) capable of storing information related to the variable display as hold storage.
The rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is executed differs between the case where the first special display result is derived and displayed and the case where the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, no change in FIGS. 8-28). The part where the ratio of is different),
When the hold memory from which the first special display result or the second special display result is derived and displayed is stored, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect for the hold memory stored after the hold memory is restricted (for example). , As shown in FIG. 8-25, the portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 090IWS304a, which does not change to “green”, “red”, and “gold” with high expectations according to the table of FIG. 8-28 (J). part).
According to such a configuration, the effect can be suitably executed when the special display result is derived and displayed.

In this example, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is restricted by limiting the color of the hold display to a part (no change, blue), but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. As restrictions, for example, the look-ahead notice effect is not executed, the number of types of the look-ahead notice effect is reduced (notice by hold display, notice by chance, notice by zone entry, etc., only the notice by hold display is executed). Normally, multiple types of pre-reading notice effects are allowed to be executed more than once, but duplicate execution is not allowed (duplicate execution of the notice by the hold display and the notice by the chance eye is allowed, but only the notice by the hold display can be executed. Various modes are conceivable. Further, the mode of the restriction mode is different depending on whether the hold storage in which the first special display result is derived and displayed is stored and the hold memory in which the second special display result is derived and displayed is stored. You may.

In this example, the look-ahead notice effect is restricted even when the hold memory of the big hit is included in addition to the small hit, but the look-ahead notice is also limited when a fluctuation pattern with a high expectation of the big hit is selected. The production may be restricted. Then, even when the target of the restriction of the look-ahead notice effect increases, the mode of the restriction is made common so that the mode does not increase, so that it is possible to prevent the lottery for determining the mode of the look-ahead notice effect from becoming complicated. ..

(Means 2A) In means 1A
The determination means determines to derive and display the specific display result (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, a portion for executing step 090IWS62 in the game control microcomputer 100).
The determination means determines to derive and display the specific display result before the determination of the determination means (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-11, steps 090IWS1216 and 090IWS1226 in the game control microcomputer 100 are performed. Part to execute),
The look-ahead notice effect execution means can execute the look-ahead notice effect based on the determination result of deriving and displaying the specific display result (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-21, in the effect control CPU 120. Step 090 IWS 807 execution part),
When the hold memory from which the specific display result is derived and displayed is stored, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect on the hold memory stored after the hold memory is restricted (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-25). , The part that executes step 090IWS304a in the effect control CPU 120, the part that does not change to "green", "red", and "gold", which are highly expected from the table of FIG. 8-28 (J)),
The restriction mode of the look-ahead notice effect is common between the case where the first special display result is derived and displayed and the case where the specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-25). The portion of the control CPU 120 that executes step 090IWS304a, the portion that does not change to “green”, “red”, and “gold”, which are highly expected from the table of FIG. 8-28 (J)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid inconsistency between the pre-reading advance notice effect and the effect after the advantageous state or in the special state, so that the pre-reading advance notice effect can be preferably executed.

(Means 3A) In means 1A or means 2A
As an effect for notifying that the special display result is derived and displayed, an effect suggesting that the special display result is controlled to the special state can be executed (for example, the portion shown in FIG. 8-29 (E)).
According to such a configuration, the variation of the advance notice production is increased, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

In this example, as a notice effect for notifying that a small hit will occur, it is suggested that the time reduction state is controlled by displaying "time reduction?" (FIG. 8-29 (E)) by executing the development production. An example of executing an effect to be performed is given, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. As a notice effect that announces that it will be a small hit, for example, a small hit (including a case where a prize is generated at the V winning opening and a big hit is obtained) that executes the same effect as the effect that suggests that it will be a big hit. Various modes can be considered, such as performing an effect that suggests that it will be. In addition to the effect of notifying the change, an effect of notifying that the special display result will be derived and displayed may be executed in the pre-reading advance notice effect.

(Means 4A) In any of means 1A to means 3A,
The determination means determines to derive and display the specific display result (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, a portion for executing step 090IWS62 in the game control microcomputer 100).
The determination means determines to derive and display the specific display result before the determination of the determination means (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-11, steps 090IWS1216 and 090IWS1226 in the game control microcomputer 100 are performed. Part to execute),
The look-ahead notice effect execution means can execute the look-ahead notice effect based on the determination result of deriving and displaying the specific display result (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-21, in the effect control CPU 120. Step 090 IWS 807 execution part),
The look-ahead effect executing means can execute the look-ahead effect that is common when the special display result is derived and displayed and when the specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, FIGS. 8-27 and FIG. (Parts shown in 8-28),
When the special display result is derived and displayed, the look-ahead effect in which the expectation that the specific display result is derived and displayed is equal to or higher than the specific value is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-28, it is set to "gold". Is the part that does not change).
According to such a configuration, since the player does not have excessive expectations, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered when the special display result is derived and displayed.

(Means 5A) In any of means 1A to means 4A,
The rate at which the pre-reading notice effect whose expected value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value is executed differs between when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example,). As shown in FIG. 8-28, the portion where the rate of change to "red" is different).
According to such a configuration, since the player does not have excessive expectations, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered when the special display result is derived and displayed.

In this example, when the small hit C (not controlled in the time saving state, but the small hit in which a prize is likely to occur at the V winning opening), the small hit A or the small hit B (controlled in the time saving state). , V A small hit that is unlikely to cause a prize at the winning opening), but the example is given that the display changes to a red hold display that does not change, but the mode is not limited to such a mode. For example, the display may change to red on hold for both small hit C and small hit A or small hit B, but small hit C is better than small hit A or small hit B. Increase the rate of change to the red hold display, change to the red hold display for small hit A or small hit B (small hit that is controlled in the time saving state, but it is difficult for winning to occur at the V winning opening) However, in the case of small hit C (small hit that is not controlled in the time saving state, but it is easy for winning to occur at the V winning opening), the red hold display does not change, and in the case of small hit C and small hit A or small hit In any case of B, it can change to the red hold display, but in the case of small hit A or small hit B, the rate of change to the red hold display is higher than in the case of small hit C, and so on. , Various aspects are conceivable.

(Means 6A) In any of means 1A to means 5A,
A plurality of types of the special display results in which the game medium does not pass through the special area are provided.
The plurality of types of the special display result are the special display result controlled to the special state when the game medium does not pass through the special area and the special display result when the game medium does not pass through the special area. Including the special display result, which is not controlled by the state,
Controlled to the special state when the game medium does not pass through the special area Control to the special state when the special display result is derived and displayed and when the game medium does not pass through the special area. When the special display result that is not displayed is derived and displayed, a different effect is executed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not the control is performed in a special state.

Further, the feature unit 090IW discloses the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1B) to (means 8B).

(Means 1B)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) based on the derivation display of a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol).
Step 090IWS462 and step 090IWS468 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 8-17, are state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. The part to execute) and
It has a special area (for example, V winning opening) and is controlled into a first state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can easily enter and a second state (for example, a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter. Possible variable means (for example, special variable winning ball device 090IW17) and
It is provided with an effect executing means capable of executing the effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step S76).
When a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed, the variable means can be controlled to the first state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-5, for game control. (Part of executing step S118 in the microcomputer 100),
The special display result is a first special display result (for example, a display result of small hit A or small hit B) and a second special display result (for example, small hit C) different from the first special display result. Display result), including
The state control means
In the normal state, when the game medium does not pass through the special area when the first special display result (for example, the display result of the small hit A or the small hit B) is derived and displayed, the special state is set. Control (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-18, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes the process of step 090IWS462 when Y at step 090IWS461a and step 090IWS468 when Y at step 090IWS467a).
In the normal state, if the game medium does not pass through the special area when the second special display result (for example, the display result of small hit C) is derived and displayed, the special state is not controlled (for example). For example, as shown in FIG. 8-18, when step 090IWS467 is N in the game control microcomputer 100, the processes of step 090IWS461a and step 090IWS462 and step 090IWS467a and step 090IWS468 are not executed).
The ease of passing through the special area of the game medium differs between when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, in FIG. 8-6). Shown part),
The effect executing means produces different effects when the variable means is in the first state depending on whether the first special display result is derived and displayed and the second special display result is derived and displayed. It is feasible (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-24, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing steps 090IWS887b and 887c, a portion shown in FIGS. 8-30 (K) and 8-32 (F)).
According to such a configuration, the effect can be suitably executed when the special display result is derived and displayed.

In this example, an example is given in which the player shifts to the time saving state after the end of the small hit game on the condition that the special winning opening is won but the V is not won, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, in the case of a small hit, the time may be shortened after the small hit game is completed on the condition that the game ball does not win in the special winning opening.

(Means 2B) In means 1B,
The rate at which the specific effect is executed in the effect during variable display differs between the case where the first special display result is derived and displayed and the case where the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, FIG. 8-FIG. 7. As shown in FIG. 8-8, the development effect is performed at the time of the small hit A or the small hit B, and is not performed at the time of the small hit C).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid inconsistency between the pre-reading advance notice effect and the effect after the advantageous state or the special state, so that the pre-reading advance notice effect can be preferably executed.

(Means 3B) In means 1B or means 2B,
The variable winning device is provided so that a game medium passing through a predetermined route (for example, a right-handed route) can enter.
Launch promotion display means for displaying launch promotion display (for example, right-handed instruction display) relating to promotion of launch of the game medium to the predetermined route For example, as shown in FIG. 8-24, steps 090IWS887b and 887c in the effect control CPU 120 are executed. With the part to do)
The launch promotion display means performs the launch promotion display in different modes depending on whether the first special display result is derived and displayed and the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, FIG. 8). As shown in -24, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing steps 090IWS887b and 887c, a portion shown in FIGS. 8-30 (K) and 8-32 (F)).
According to such a configuration, the game can be suitably advanced.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is opened so as not to win a V when the small hit A or the small hit B shifts to the time saving state after the small hit game is completed on the condition that the V prize is not won. However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, on the condition that the V prize is not won, the time may be shortened after the small hit game is completed, and a small hit may be provided to open the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 so that the V prize can be easily won.

(Means 4B) In any of means 1B to means 3B,
The variable winning means can be controlled to the first state by different patterns depending on whether the first special display result is derived and displayed and the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example,). The part shown in FIG. 8-6).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not the control is performed in a special state.

(Means 5B) In any of means 1B to means 4B,
The variable winning means can control the first state according to the same pattern when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably control whether or not to control the special state, and it is possible to prevent in advance from detecting which special display result is derived and displayed.

(Means 6B) In any of means 1B to means 5B,
The variable winning means is a movable member (for example, a V winning opening opening / closing plate) that performs a common operation when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed. 090IW20)
When the first special display result is derived and displayed, the variable winning means is controlled to the first state when the movable member is in a state of obstructing the passage of the game medium to the special area.
When the second special display result is derived and displayed, the variable winning means is controlled to the first state when the movable member is in a state of not obstructing the passage of the game medium to the special area ( For example, the part shown in FIG. 8-6).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not the control is performed in a special state.

(Means 7B) In any of means 1B to means 6B,
The variable winning means is a movable member (for example, a V winning opening opening / closing plate) that performs a common operation when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed. 090IW20)
The period until the variable winning means is controlled to the first state differs depending on whether the first special display result is derived and displayed and the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, FIG. The part shown in 8-34).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not the control is performed in a special state.

(Means 8B) In any of means 1B to means 7B,
A plurality of types of the special display results in which the game medium does not pass through the special area are provided.
The plurality of types of the special display result are the special display result controlled to the special state when the game medium does not pass through the special area and the special display result when the game medium does not pass through the special area. Including the special display result, which is not controlled by the state,
Controlled to the special state when the game medium does not pass through the special area Control to the special state when the special display result is derived and displayed and when the game medium does not pass through the special area. When the special display result that is not displayed is derived and displayed, a different effect is executed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not the control is performed in a special state.

Further, the feature unit 090IW discloses the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1C) to (means 8C).

(Means 1C)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) based on the derivation display of a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol).
Step 090IWS462 and step 090IWS468 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 8-17, are state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. The part to execute) and
It has a special area (for example, V winning opening) and is controlled into a first state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can easily enter and a second state (for example, a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter. Possible variable means (for example, special variable winning ball device 090IW17) and
An effect executing means capable of executing the effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step S76) and
The variable display of the first identification information can be executed based on the passage of the game medium through the first start area, and the variable display of the second identification information is executed based on the passage of the game medium through the second start area. A possible variable display execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a portion for executing step S110 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided.
When a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed, the variable means can be controlled to the first state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-5, for game control. (Part of executing step S118 in the microcomputer 100),
The special display result is a first special display result (for example, a display result of small hit A or small hit B) and a second special display result (for example, small hit C) different from the first special display result. Display result), including
The state control means
In the normal state, when the game medium does not pass through the special area when the first special display result (for example, the display result of the small hit A or the small hit B) is derived and displayed, the special state is set. Control (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-18, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes the process of step 090IWS462 when Y at step 090IWS461a and step 090IWS468 when Y at step 090IWS467a).
In the normal state, if the game medium does not pass through the special area when the second special display result (for example, the display result of small hit C) is derived and displayed, the special state is not controlled (for example). For example, as shown in FIG. 8-18, when step 090IWS467 is N in the game control microcomputer 100, the processes of step 090IWS461a and step 090IWS462 and step 090IWS467a and step 090IWS468 are not executed).
The special display result is derived and displayed by executing the variable display of the first identification information, and the special display result is derived and displayed by executing the variable display of the second identification information. The ratio at which the second special display result is derived and displayed is different (for example, the portion shown in FIGS. 8-5 (C) (D)).
The effect executing means produces different effects when the variable means is in the first state depending on whether the first special display result is derived and displayed and the second special display result is derived and displayed. It is feasible (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-24, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing steps 090IWS887b and 887c, a portion shown in FIGS. 8-30 (K) and 8-32 (F)).
According to such a configuration, the effect can be suitably executed when the special display result is derived and displayed.

In this example, an example is given in which the player shifts to the time saving state after the end of the small hit game on the condition that the special winning opening is won but the V is not won, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, in the case of a small hit, the time may be shortened after the small hit game is completed on the condition that the game ball does not win in the special winning opening.

(Means 2C) In means 1C
The rate at which the specific effect is executed in the effect during variable display differs between the case where the first special display result is derived and displayed and the case where the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, FIG. 8-FIG. 7. As shown in FIG. 8-8, the development effect is performed at the time of the small hit A or the small hit B, and is not performed at the time of the small hit C).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid inconsistency between the pre-reading advance notice effect and the effect after the advantageous state or the special state, so that the pre-reading advance notice effect can be preferably executed.

(Means 3C) In means 1C or means 2C
The variable winning device is provided so that a game medium passing through a predetermined route (for example, a right-handed route) can enter.
Launch promotion display means for displaying launch promotion display (for example, right-handed instruction display) relating to promotion of launch of the game medium to the predetermined route For example, as shown in FIG. 8-24, steps 090IWS887b and 887c in the effect control CPU 120 are executed. With the part to do)
The launch promotion display means performs the launch promotion display in different modes depending on whether the first special display result is derived and displayed and the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, FIG. 8). As shown in -24, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing steps 090IWS887b and 887c, a portion shown in FIGS. 8-30 (K) and 8-32 (F)).
According to such a configuration, the game can be suitably advanced.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 is opened so as not to win a V when the small hit A or the small hit B shifts to the time saving state after the small hit game is completed on the condition that the V prize is not won. However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, on the condition that the V prize is not won, the time may be shortened after the small hit game is completed, and a small hit may be provided to open the special variable winning ball device 090IW17 so that the V prize can be easily won.

(Means 4C) In any of means 1C to means 3C,
The variable winning means can be controlled to the first state by different patterns depending on whether the first special display result is derived and displayed and the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example,). The part shown in FIG. 8-6).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not the control is performed in a special state.

(Means 5C) In any of means 1C to means 4C,
The variable winning means can control the first state according to the same pattern when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably control whether or not to control the special state, and it is possible to prevent in advance from detecting which special display result is derived and displayed.

(Means 6C) In any of means 1C to means 5C,
The variable winning means is a movable member (for example, a V winning opening opening / closing plate) that performs a common operation when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed. 090IW20)
When the first special display result is derived and displayed, the variable winning means is controlled to the first state when the movable member is in a state of obstructing the passage of the game medium to the special area.
When the second special display result is derived and displayed, the variable winning means is controlled to the first state when the movable member is in a state of not obstructing the passage of the game medium to the special area ( For example, the part shown in FIG. 8-6).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not the control is performed in a special state.

(Means 7C) In any of means 1C to means 6C,
The variable winning means is a movable member (for example, a V winning opening opening / closing plate) that performs a common operation when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed. 090IW20)
The period until the variable winning means is controlled to the first state differs depending on whether the first special display result is derived and displayed and the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, FIG. The part shown in 8-34).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not the control is performed in a special state.

(Means 8C) In any of means 1C to means 7C,
A plurality of types of the special display results in which the game medium does not pass through the special area are provided.
The plurality of types of the special display result are the special display result controlled to the special state when the game medium does not pass through the special area and the special display result when the game medium does not pass through the special area. Including the special display result, which is not controlled by the state,
Controlled to the special state when the game medium does not pass through the special area Control to the special state when the special display result is derived and displayed and when the game medium does not pass through the special area. When the special display result that is not displayed is derived and displayed, a different effect is executed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not the control is performed in a special state.

(Explanation of feature section 079SG)
Next, the feature portion 079SG (hereinafter, abbreviated as the present feature portion 079SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 9-1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 079SG. As shown in FIG. 9-1, the voice control board 13 in the feature unit 079SG is used for voice synthesis to generate sounds (effect sounds) output from the speakers 8L and 8R in cooperation with the effect control CPU 120. The IC079SG132, the amplification circuit (amplifier) 079SG134 for amplifying the output sound of the sound generated by the voice synthesis CI079SG132, and the voice data ROM 079SG133 are mounted, and the effect control CPU 120 is from the main board 11. The sound number data is output to the voice synthesis IC079SG132 based on the effect control command, and the sound corresponding to the sound number data is generated in the voice synthesis IC079SG132.

When sound number data is input from the effect control CPU 120, the voice synthesis IC 079SG 132 individually generates sounds and sound effects corresponding to the input sound number data for each of the speakers 8L and 8R, and causes the amplifier circuit 079SG134. Output. The amplifier circuit 079SG134 amplifies the voice and sound effects output from the voice synthesis IC 079SG132, and outputs them to the speakers 8L and 8R.

The audio data ROM 079SG133 stores control data for each of the speakers 8L and 8R for outputting a sound corresponding to the effect performed by the effect command corresponding to the sound number data in association with the sound number data. .. That is, these control data are output modes (frequency characteristics, timing (delay), etc.) of sound effects such as sound effects and BGM (musical pieces) output from each speaker 8L, 8R during the effect period (for example, the decorative pattern variable display period). Is a collection of data including audio data and the like described in chronological order.

FIG. 9-2 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an image display device 5 in the feature unit 079. The display area of the image display device 5 in the feature unit 079SG is formed in a rectangular shape having a height L and a left-right width L when viewed from the front. Most of the display area constitutes a first display area 079SG005F for displaying an effect such as a variable display of a decorative pattern, a reach effect, an operation promotion effect described later, and a still image display effect. Further, the lower end portion of the image display device 5 has a first reserved storage display area 079SG005D in which the first special figure reserved storage number can be displayed by the number of white circular hold displays, and the second special figure reserved storage number is outlined. A second display area 079SG005Sa including a second hold storage display area 079SG005U that can be displayed by the number of circular hold displays and a telop display area 079SG005T that can display a telop indicating a game state is configured.

That is, the portion of the entire display area of the image display device 5 excluding the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is the first display area 079SG005F.

The second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb display information related to the game (hold display, telop display, fourth symbol) at the peripheral portion of the display area of the image display device 5 rather than the first display area 079SG005F. This is the display area for displaying (displaying the number of stored items on hold). That is, the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb in the feature unit 079SG are also UI (user interface) display areas in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The upper right end of the image display device 5 includes a fourth symbol 079SG005J indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed, a display of the first special symbol reserved storage number, and a display of the second special symbol reserved storage number. 3 Display area 079SG005Sb is configured.

Of these, the second display area 079SG005Sa is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and its height is formed to be less than half the height H of the entire display area of the image display device 5. The left-right width is formed to have the same length as the left-right width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5. Further, the third display area 079SG005Sb is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, but its height and left-right width are formed to be extremely shorter than the height H and the left-right width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5. There is.

Therefore, in the feature unit 079SG, the area of the first display area 079SG005F in the entire display area of the image display device 5 is larger than the combined area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. ..

As shown in FIG. 9-2 (B), in the first hold storage display area 079SG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold display operation process (see FIG. 8-13) described later. As a result, each hold display can be rotated and displayed at a constant speed (for example, rotation speed V3) around the vertical axis.

As shown in FIG. 9-2 (C), in the telop display area 079SG005T, the effect control CPU 120 executes the telop operation process (see FIG. 9-13) described later to respond to the gaming state and the effect being executed. A message (for example, a message according to the state of the effect such as "XX mode is in progress!" During a specific reach effect) is moved by a constant speed (for example, movement speed V3) from the left to the right. It is possible to display while.

The characters included in the message according to the game state reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T and end the display, and at the same time, are displayed again at the left end of the telop display area 079SG005T and are displayed again from the left to the right. Moved in the direction. Therefore, when the message corresponding to the game state is displayed while being moved in the telop display area 079SG005T, the entire message according to the game state is always displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, so that the player can see the message. It is easier to recognize the current game state.

In the feature unit 079SG, the hold display in the first hold storage display area 079SG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U and the message in the telop display area 079SG005T are rotated and moved at a common constant speed (V3). Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold display in the first hold storage display area 079SG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U and the message in the telop display area 079SG005T have different constant speeds. It may be rotatable and movable with.

As shown in FIG. 9-2 (D), the fourth symbol 079SG005J has an upper symbol 079SG005Ja and a lower symbol 079SG005Jb, and the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb blink alternately at a fixed cycle. Indicates that a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. Further, when the variable display result is off, both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are turned off (OFF) at the end timing of the variable display, while the variable display result is a big hit or a miss. In that case, both are lit (turned on) at the end timing of the variable display.

The display of the first special figure reserved storage number and the display of the second special figure reserved storage number in the third display area 079SG005Sb are the timing when a new reserved storage occurs and the timing when a new variable display is started. Only the number changes. That is, the display of the first special figure reserved storage number and the display of the second special figure reserved storage number in the third display area 079SG005Sb are the fourth symbol 079SG005J, the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, and the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U. , Unlike the telop display area 079SG005T, the display mode does not change except for the start timing of the variable display.

Next, the display control unit 123 in the feature unit 079SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying an image on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 can display a predetermined image on the image display device 5 based on the image data of 1 stored in the CGROM based on the instruction by the effect control CPU 120, and can display a plurality of types of image data. By arranging and displaying an image on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When the predetermined image is not displayed on the image display device 5, the image of the predetermined image is imaged by arranging another image data on the front side of the image data of the predetermined image with a transparency of 0% depending on the situation. The predetermined image is not displayed on the effect screen by controlling the image based on the data so as not to be displayed on the effect screen and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 that has created the display data in which the image data of the predetermined image is not arranged. It may be controlled as such.

As shown in FIGS. 9-3 (A) to 9-3 (D), for example, when displaying an image on the image display device 5, a plurality of image data including image data 1 to 3 are arranged. An image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the created display data.

As shown in FIG. 9-3 (A), the image data 1 displays the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and the fourth This is data drawn to display the symbol 079SG005J in the third display area 079SG005Sb. It is also data drawn for displaying a small symbol of the image data 1 decorative symbol in the first display area 079SG005F (on the left side of the third display area 079SG005Sb).

As shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), the image data 2 is data drawn for displaying the images of the chance-up effect, the still image display effect, and the operation promotion effect, which will be described later, in the first display area 079SG005F. ..

As shown in FIG. 9-3 (C), the image data 3 is data drawn for displaying the variable display of the decorative pattern and the reach effect in the first display area 079SG005F.

As shown in FIGS. 9-3 (A) to 9-3 (C), the image data 1, the image data 2, and the image data 3 have display priorities for displaying an image on the image display device 5. Is set. As for the display priority, the image data 1 is set to the highest and the image data 3 is set to the lowest (image display priority in the image display device 5: image data 1> image data 2> image data 3). .. That is, in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed as an image lower than the image based on the image data 1, and is based on the image data 3. The image is displayed as an image of a lower layer (bottom layer) than the image based on the image data 1 and the image based on the image data 2. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (D), in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed with priority over the image based on the image data 3, and the image based on the image data 1 is displayed. The image based on the image data 2 and the image based on the image data 3 are displayed with priority.

As shown in FIG. 9-3 (D), when the image based on the image data 1, the image based on the image data 2, and the image based on the image data 3 are simultaneously displayed on the image display device 5, the image data 3 Since the image based on is displayed as the image of the lowest layer, at least a part of the image based on the image data 3 becomes difficult to see or invisible due to the image based on the first data or the image based on the image data 2. There is.

Although details will be described later in this feature unit 079SG, the image based on the image data 1 and the image data 2 is displayed on the image display device 5 as a moving image whose progress speed is always constant, while on the image data 3. The based image is displayed on the image display device 5 as a plurality of moving speed moving images or still images based on the data stored in the CGROM in advance.

In particular, in this feature unit 079SG, although details will be described later, it is possible to display a moving image of the reach effect at a normal progress speed V1 and a progress speed V2 (slow motion) slower than the V1 during the reach effect of the super reach. It has become. This is because the data for the production moving image displayed at the progress speed V1 and the data for the production movie displayed at the progress speed V2 are stored in advance in the CGROM, but the present invention is limited to this. Only the data for the production video to be displayed at the progress speed V1 is stored in advance in the CGROM, and a part of the production video for the reach production is set to the progress speed V2 by performing a predetermined process on the data. May be displayable.

In this way, in the feature unit 079SG, the progress speed of the reach effect recognized by the player is set to V1 by setting the image progress speed, which is the speed at which the effect video changes, to the first speed, which is the non-slow motion period and the image. By setting the progress speed to V2, which is slower than V1, the slow motion period is set to the second speed at which the progress speed of the reach effect recognized by the player is slow. That is, the slow-motion video, which is a production video in which the speed of the production in the feature unit 079SG is slow, is the video progress as compared with the non-slow-motion video whose video progress speed is V1 displayed in front of the slow-motion video. Anything with a slow speed will do.

The feature unit 079SG exemplifies a form in which a slow motion period is provided in all super reach effects (see FIGS. 9-18 to 9-25), but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, for example, as a super reach effect, the content of the effect moving image displayed on the image display device 5 is the same as the content of the super reach effect shown in FIGS. 9-18 to 9-25, but the video progress speed. Does not change from V1 to V2, that is, the slow motion period does not occur. By executing the super reach effect, the slow motion period is achieved in the super reach effect shown in FIGS. 9-18 to 9-25. May be made easier for the player to recognize.

That is, in the case of executing the super reach effect in which the content of the effect movie is the same but the video progress speed does not change to V2, the effect movie is a second speed slower than the first speed in the present invention. Is that the same content of the production video is displayed at a video progress speed V2 slower than the video progress speed V1 in the non-slow motion super reach production, so that the production video has a longer period than the non-slow motion super reach production. The displayed production video corresponds to this.

As described above, the feature unit 079SG configures a slow motion effect in which the reach effect felt by the player is slow by slowing the image advance speed of the effect moving image, and the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. Although the output of the above is illustrated as a form that does not change from the playback speed V3, the present invention is not limited to this, and the speakers 8L, 8R are not limited to this, and the video progress speed of the production moving image is not changed (V1 remains). By conversely increasing the reproduction speed of the sound output from the speaker and the light emission cycle of the game effect lamp 9, a pseudo slow motion that the player feels that the progress speed of the reach effect has slowed down may be configured.

That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 079SG includes a plurality of effect output means including display means capable of displaying the effect moving image, and the progress speed of the effect by at least one of these effect output means. Is different between the slow motion period and the non-slow motion period, so that the player can recognize that the effect being executed is slow motion in the slow motion period.

It should be noted that the feature unit 079SG exemplifies a mode in which the display of the production moving image of the reach effect is always executed at the progress speed V2 during the slow motion period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the slow motion is not limited to this. The period may be such that the progress speed of the display of the effect moving image of the reach effect can be changed (for example, the progress speed gradually decreases with the passage of time, or the progress speed increases or decreases within a predetermined range).

FIG. 9-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 079SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 9-4 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a symbol (also referred to as an effect symbol). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (pre-determined result) and the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result specification command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. .. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C". The command 8C04H is the fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is used as the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is executed by the time saving control. On the other hand, it is a second game state specification command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, the command 9502H is used as the third game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) in which the time saving control is performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is used as the time saving control and probability change. This is the fourth game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high accuracy high base state, time reduction probability change state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit game or a small hit game. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that it is a period during which the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game or the small hit.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result specification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. .. In the notification command during opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening of the big winning opening, different EXT data are set according to the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "10") in the big hit state described later, for example. ..

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A has been satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B has been satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The commands shown in FIG. 9-4 (A) are examples, and some of these commands may not be provided, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You may add a command different from the command in. For example, a prize ball number notification command for making it possible to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of a game ball at each winning opening, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times that the probability change control or the time reduction control is executed, or the like may be provided.

FIG. 9-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 9-5, in the feature unit 079SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern , Numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 for determining the display result of the general map is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 shown in FIG. 9-10, and updates various numerical data by software to update the random number value. Numerical data indicating a part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a "big hit" to the big hit game state, for example. It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type has any of "probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" when the variable display result is "big hit". It is a random value used to determine, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any of a plurality of types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to "1" to "". It takes a value in the range of 997.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per normal figure" or "out of normal figure". It is a random number value to be obtained, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 9-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. The feature unit 079SG uses a special figure display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The first special figure and the second special figure may use individual special figure display result determination tables.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. This is the referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature unit 079SG, depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing".

In the special figure display result judgment table 1, whether or not the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment is controlled to the big hit game state with the special figure display result as a "big hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature unit 079SG, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are obtained than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state is higher than the probability of being determined (about 1/300 in the main feature part 079SG) (about 1 in the main feature part 079SG). / 30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, it is determined that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probability change state (high probability state), it is controlled to the jackpot game state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability of the game is high.

Further, FIG. 9-6 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is determined based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. The table referenced for.

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the feature unit 079SG, regardless of whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, whether or not the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result judgment table 2 in the feature unit 079SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" is different between the case of the special figure game of the first special figure and the case of the second special figure. There is. Specifically, in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, it is assigned to "small hit". Judgment value is not assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning is formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control. In the high base state where a prize is given to the mouth and a lot of variable display of the second special figure is executed, "small hit" is almost not generated, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. In a high base state in which a game ball easily enters the winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which a large number of game balls cannot be obtained and to prevent the game interest from being deteriorated.

FIG. 9-7 (A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in the feature unit 079SG sets the jackpot type to any of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit". It is a table referenced to determine the crab. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (first). 2 The numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot", "probability variation jackpot A", or "probability variation jackpot A", depending on whether the game is a special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B). It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "probability variation jackpot B" and "probability variation jackpot C".

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 079SG will be described with reference to FIG. 9-7 (B). In the feature unit 079SG, the jackpot type includes high accuracy control and time saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability change big hit A", "Probability change big hit B", "Probability change big hit C" which are executed and shift to the high accuracy high base state, and only the time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit game state to the low accuracy high base state. A "non-probability change jackpot" to be transferred is set.

The big hit game state by the "probability change big hit A" is a big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. The big hit game state by the "probability change big hit B" is a big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. The jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot C" is a jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds) in a first state that is advantageous to the player. Further, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds) in a first state that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, "Probability change jackpot A" is called 10 rounds (10R) probability variation jackpot, "Probability variation jackpot B" is called 5 rounds (5R) probability variation jackpot, and "Probability variation jackpot C" is called 2 rounds (2R) probability variation jackpot. It may be called as a "non-probable variable jackpot" and may be referred to as a two-round (2R) non-probable variable jackpot.

Further, although not particularly shown, the small hit game state in the feature unit 079SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player twice, and the opening time is the same as the probability variation big hit C. It is an open period (0.1 seconds in this feature unit 079SG). After the small hit game is completed, the game state immediately before the small hit game is inherited.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probabilistic jackpot A, the probabilistic jackpot B, and the probabilistic jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. .. Therefore, when the jackpot that occurs again is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "non-probability change big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature unit 079SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times. It ends when the game is in a big hit game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), "probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot A" are set according to whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure. The allocation of judgment values for the jackpot types of "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" is different. That is, when the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the determination value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "probability change jackpot B" or "probability change" with a small number of rounds. While assigned to the jackpot type of "big hit C", if the special figure that is variably displayed is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined to control the jackpot type to the jackpot state with a small number of rounds as "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Due to the high opening control, in a game state in which a game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the frequent occurrence of a big hit state in which a small number of winning balls can be obtained is avoided, and the game interest is reduced. It is designed to prevent this.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Since it is the same regardless of whether it exists, the probability of becoming a non-probability jackpot and the probability of becoming a probabilistic jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is a special figure game of the first special figure or a second special figure. It is said that.

Therefore, as described above, the allocation of the judgment values for the "probability variation jackpot B" and the "probability variation jackpot C" differs depending on whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value to the "probability change jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure, and for the "probability change jackpot A" having a large number of rounds, the second It is set so that the case of the special figure game of the special figure is easier to determine than the case of the special figure game of the first special figure.

Even in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special figure game of the first special figure is the big hit of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". It may be assigned to a type. For example, in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, a smaller judgment value than in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data regardless of whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 9-8 shows the fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 079SG. In the feature unit 079SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is variable according to each of the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach". A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out of reach" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "out of reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed. Although the feature unit 079SG provides only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, and so on are provided. It may be provided. Further, in the super reach fluctuation pattern, a plurality of super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided, such as super reach α, super reach β, and so on.

The fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 079SG also includes a fluctuation pattern (PC1-1) of a special hit corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a “small hit”.

As shown in FIG. 9-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 079SG is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined first, such as a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, and the like. Then, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation pattern belonging to the determined type, it is determined using only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided for determining the variation pattern type. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value of the above, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 9-9 is an explanatory diagram of a method of determining a fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 079SG. In this feature unit 079SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is different depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved storages.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-9, when the variable display result is a non-probability variation jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is used using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach α3 jackpot fluctuation pattern) and PB1-4 (super reach β1 jackpot fluctuation pattern) And PB1-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β3 jackpot). If the variable display result is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is set to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot) using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. It is determined from the fluctuation pattern) and PB1-2 (the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot).

As shown in FIG. 9-9, the number of assigned determination values for PB1-2 to PB1-5 is different between the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, 45 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, 150 determination values are assigned to PB1-3, 300 determination values are assigned to PB1-4, and 500 determination values are assigned to PB1-5. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, 30 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, 135 determination values are assigned to PB1-3, 315 determination values are assigned to PB1-4, and 515 determination values are assigned to PB1-5. That is, in this feature unit 079SG, when the variable display result is a probabilistic jackpot, PB1-3 and PB1-4, which are fluctuation patterns of the super reach β system, are at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-probability jackpot. Since it is determined to be, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

If the variable display result is a small hit, a special hit variation pattern determination table is selected, and the variation pattern is determined to be PC1-1 (special hit variation pattern) using the special hit variation pattern determination table. To do.

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 2 or less, the deviation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern determination table A is selected. Using the out-of-reach variation pattern determination table A, the variation patterns are PA1-1 (non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach out-of-range variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α2 out-of-reach variation pattern), and PA2. It is determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern out of super reach α3), PA2-4 (variation pattern out of super reach β2), and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern out of super reach β3).

Further, when the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 3, the deviation pattern determination table B for deviation is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α2 loss), and PA2. It is determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern out of super reach α3), PA2-4 (variation pattern out of super reach β2), and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern out of super reach β3).

Further, when the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 4, the deviation pattern determination table C for deviation is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α2 loss), and PA2. It is determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern out of super reach α3), PA2-4 (variation pattern out of super reach β2), and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern out of super reach β3).

If the variable display result is "out of place" in the time saving state (high base state), the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determination table D is used to set the variation pattern to PA1-4. (Non-reach out-of-time shortening fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach out-of-time fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α2 out-of-order fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach α3 out-of-range fluctuation pattern), and PA2 It is determined from -4 (fluctuation pattern out of super reach β2) and PA2-5 (variation pattern out of super reach β3).

That is, when the variable display result is "out of place" in the feature unit 079SG, the special figure is based on the fact that the number of reserved memory of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, or the time is shortened. Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), the variable display is executed at a higher rate due to the shortening fluctuation pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4). It is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being delayed.

As shown in FIG. 9-8, the reach effect of the super reach α1 (the reach effect executed by the variable display of the fluctuation pattern PB1-2) is variable after the first half of the first reach effect described later is executed. The reach effect that the display result is a big hit, and the reach effect of the super reach α2 (the reach effect executed by the variable display of the variable pattern PA2-2) executes the first half part and the second half part of the first reach effect described later. This is a reach effect in which the variable display result is out of order, and the reach effect of the super reach α3 (the reach effect executed by the variable display in the variable pattern PA2-3 or PB1-3) is the first reach described later. This is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a big hit or a miss by executing the second reach effect described later after executing the first half portion and the second half part of the effect.

As for the variable display of these fluctuation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3, as shown in FIGS. 9-8 and 9-9, the longer the special figure variable display time is, the more variable the display is. The rate at which the result is a big hit (big hit expectation) is set to be high. That is, for the variable display of these fluctuation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3, the ratio of the variable display result being a big hit is executed by the first reach effect. The variable display result is set higher than the ratio that becomes a big hit.

In addition, the reach effect of super reach β1 (reach effect executed by the variable display of the variable pattern PB1-4) is a reach effect in which the variable display result becomes a big hit after executing the first half of the third reach effect described later. Yes, in the reach effect of super reach β2 (the reach effect executed by the variable display of the variable pattern PA2-4), the variable display result is out of alignment after executing the first half part and the second half part of the third reach effect described later. The reach effect of the super reach β3 (the reach effect executed by the variable display in the variable pattern PA2-5 or PB1-5) is the first half part and the second half part of the third reach effect described later. After that, the fourth reach effect, which will be described later, is executed, and the variable display result is a big hit or a miss.

As for the variable display of these fluctuation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, and PB1-5, as shown in FIGS. 9-8 and 9-9, the longer the special figure variable display time is, the more variable the display is. The rate at which the result is a big hit (big hit expectation) is set to be high. That is, for the variable display of these fluctuation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, and PB1-5, the ratio of the variable display result being a big hit after being executed up to the fourth reach effect is executed by the third reach effect. The variable display result is set higher than the ratio that becomes a big hit.

In the feature unit 079SG, the embodiment in which the second reach effect is always executed after the first reach effect and the fourth reach effect is always executed after the third reach effect is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. The second reach effect and the fourth reach effect may be performed by themselves.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, each reach effect can be executed by a combination of the first reach effect and the second reach effect during the variable display, and can be executed by the combination of the third reach effect and the fourth reach effect. Although possible forms have been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach effect is a combination other than these combinations (for example, a first reach effect and a fourth reach effect, a second reach effect and a third reach effect). A case may be provided in which the execution is performed by a combination of reach effects and the like).

Further, in the present feature section 069SG, as shown in FIG. 9-9, the fluctuation patterns of the super reach β system (fluctuation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) are generally super reach α system. The rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit (big hit expectation) is set higher than the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) of the present invention. A part of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β system (variation pattern PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) is not limited, and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α system (variation pattern PA2- 2. The jackpot expectation may be lower than any of PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3).

In the RAM 102 of the feature unit 079SG, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a game control data holding area 079SG150 as shown in FIG. 9-10. Is provided. The game control data holding area 079SG150 shown in FIG. 9-10 includes a first special figure holding storage unit 079SG151A, a second special figure holding storage unit 079SG151B, a normal drawing holding storage unit 079SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 079SG152. , The game control timer setting unit 079SG153, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, and the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 are provided.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A is a special feature in which the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting winning (first starting winning) is generated, but has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the first starting winning opening with the holding number, and determines the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern extracted from a random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As a result, the data is stored until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 079SG151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the result), it becomes pending information that makes it possible to judge whether or not it will be a big hit.

The second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B has not been started yet, although the game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the second starting winning opening with the holding number, and determines the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern extracted from a random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As a result, the number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 079SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the result), it becomes pending information that makes it possible to judge whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit 079SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal figure hold storage unit 079SG151C associates the game ball with the hold number in the order in which it passes through the passage gate 41, and determines the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is set as pending data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit 079SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 079SG152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 079SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 079SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 079SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, a random number value not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and is stored as a random count value according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 holds the effect control data as shown in FIG. 9-11 (A) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. Area 079 SG190 is provided. The effect control data holding area 079SG190 shown in FIG. 9-11 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 079SG191, an effect control timer setting unit 079SG192, an effect control counter setting unit 079SG193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 079SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 079SG191 has a plurality of types capable of updating the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 079SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 079SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 079SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 079SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 079SG193 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 079SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 079SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the feature unit 079SG, the data constituting the start winning command buffer 079SG194A as shown in FIG. 9-11 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 079SG194. The reception command buffer 079SG194A at the time of starting winning is stored in the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the first special figure reserved storage. A corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during variable display are provided. Further, the start winning command buffer 079SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage. (Area corresponding to) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure during variable display are provided. When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (the 1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command) and the hold memory number notification command (the first) Two commands (1 hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 079SG194A associate these start opening winning designation commands with the hold storage number notification command. , A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage separately is secured.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in a variable manner. It is designed to be cleared in the special figure hit waiting process that is executed when the is finished.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the command buffer 079SG194A received at the time of starting winning. Then, at the time of the start winning to the second start winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the free entry corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 079SG194A. I will go. At the time of the start winning, the start opening prize designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start opening prize designation command is placed in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. , The hold memory count notification command will be stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 079SG194A shown in FIG. 9-11 (B) is an entry (buffer) corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display that ended immediately before each time the variable display of the decorative symbol was started. The entry (entry with the number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2") is deleted. The stored contents of the entries after the hold storage of the variable display to be started are shifted from those stored in the entry corresponding to -1 ”. For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol of the first special figure hold storage is completed in the stored state shown in FIG. 9-11 (B), each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted and the buffer number is deleted. Each command stored in "1" is shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is moved to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1". Each command that is shifted and stored in the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" is an area (entry) for storing each command related to the hold storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the start winning determination process of the feature unit 079SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 6 will be described with reference to FIG. 9-12. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in the state (step 079 SGS101). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 079 SGS101; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the first special figure, is the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 079 SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154. When the first special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is set to "1" (step 079SGS102; N). Step 079 SGS103).

Variable when the first start port switch 22A is off in step 079SGS101 (step 079SGS101; N) or when the first special figure hold storage number reaches the upper limit value in step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; Y). Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( Step 079 SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 079 SGS104; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the second special figure, is the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 079 SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154. When the second special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in step 079SGS105 (step 079SGS105; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is set to "2" (step 079SGS105; N). Step 079 SGS106).

After executing any of the processes of step 079SGS103 and step 079SGS106, the number of special figure hold storages corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (step 079SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first hold memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (step 079 SGS108). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, may be updated so as to be added by 1.

After executing the process of step 079SGS108, the CPU 103 determines the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random number of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for the purpose and the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (step 079 SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step 079 SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A stores numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the start port buffer value is "2". Numerical data indicating the random values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B.

Numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is "big hit", and further, the variable display result It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of step 079SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used for determining the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol and the variable display mode including the variable display time.

Following the process of step 079 SGS110, the transmission setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (step 079 SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first start opening prize designation command to 12 is made. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is subjected to. Make settings to send the second start port winning designation command. The start port winning designation command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

Following the process of step 079 SGS111, for example, by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the hold storage is stored in the effect control board 12. Make settings for sending the number notification command (step 079 SGS113). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

After executing the process of step 079SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114; Y), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 079SGS115), and then the process of step 079SGS104 is performed. move on. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (step 079 SGS114; N), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 079 SGS116), and then the start prize is won. End the process. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 9-13 is a part of a flowchart showing the effect control process processing in the feature unit 079SG. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 updates the hold display in the first hold storage display area 079SHSG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U after executing the pre-reading advance notice setting process (step S161), and these first Hold display operation processing (step 079SG162) for operating (rotating display) the hold display displayed in the hold storage display area 079SHSG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the operation display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T. After executing the telop operation process (step 079SGS163) to be performed and the fourth symbol display process (step 079SG164) to execute the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J, any one of steps S170 to S177 is executed according to the value of the effect control process flag. Executes the processing of.

9-14 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 9. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 079 SGS271). When the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 079SG194A are set. The various command data and various flags stored in association with each other are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 079SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is off in step 079SGS271 (step 079SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273). When the second variation start command reception flag is off (step 079SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is finished, and when the second variation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273; Y), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the received command buffer 079SG194A at the time of starting winning are stored for each buffer number. Shift to the top (step 079 SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 079SGS272 or step 079SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 079SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 079SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. To do.

In the feature unit 079SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, three symbols "7" as stop symbols. ”Determine the combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command or the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B or the probability variation jackpot C, the stop symbol is other than "7". It is determined from a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to the non-probability change jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, a decorative symbol in which three symbols are arranged as even symbols as the stop symbol. Determine the combination (big hit symbol). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to a small hit, the stop symbol is determined from "334", "778", etc., which are chance eyes. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the deviation, it is a decorative symbol in which the three symbols are not uniform as the stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance eyes. (Out of design) is decided.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (step 079 SGS277). When the variable display variation pattern is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277; N), the process proceeds to step 079SGS283, and when the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277; Y). Executes the chance-up effect determination process (step 079 SGS278), and determines whether or not to execute the chance-up effect in the latter half of the first reach effect or the second half of the third reach effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-15, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the chance-up effect is decided to be executed at a rate of 20%, and the chance-up effect is not executed at a rate of 80%. decide. When the variable display result is a big hit, the execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 80%, and the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 20%. That is, in the variable display of the reach of the feature unit 079SG, when the chance-up effect is executed, the jackpot expectation is set higher than when the chan-up effect is not executed.

As shown in FIGS. 9-27 and 9-32, the feature unit 079SG is provided with only one effect pattern as the effect mode of the chance-up effect, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a plurality of effect patterns may be provided as an effect mode of the chance-up effect, and the jackpot expectation may be different depending on which effect pattern the chance-up effect is executed.

Further, in the present feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 9-27 and 9-32, there is only one production start timing of the chance-up effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the chance-up effect is not limited to this. A plurality of production start timings of the production may be provided, and the jackpot expectation may be different depending on which production start timing the chance-up production is started.

Further, after the execution / non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined in step 079 SGS278, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3). (Step 079 SGS279). When the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3) (step 079SGS279; Y), the notification effect (big hit notification effect or loss) is performed after the second reach effect is completed. In the period until the notification effect) is started, the still image display effect for determining the effect pattern of the still image display effect that displays the still image displayed on the image display device 5 at the end of the second reach effect. The determination process (step 079SGS280) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 079SGS283.

In the still image display effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 9-16 (A), the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect pattern of the still image display effect at a rate of 100% when the variable display result is out of alignment. If the pattern SG-1 is determined and the variable display result is a big hit, the effect pattern of the still image display effect is determined to be the pattern SG-1 at a rate of 80%, and the pattern SG-2 is determined at a rate of 20%. To do.

As shown in FIG. 9-16 (B), the still image display effect pattern SG-1 stops the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 at the end of the second reach effect. It is an effect pattern to be displayed as an image, and the still image display effect pattern SG-2 is after displaying the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 as a still image at the end of the second reach effect. , It is an effect pattern that changes the color of the still image.

In particular, the pattern SG-2 is an effect pattern that is executed only when the variable display result is a big hit. Therefore, when the second reach effect is executed, is the still image display effect executed in the pattern SG-2? It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not (whether or not the color of the still image changes).

Further, when it is not the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α3 in step 079SGS281 (step 079SGS281; N), it is further determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the super reach β3 (PA2-5 or PB1-5) (step 079SGS281; N). Step S079SGS282). When the variable display variation pattern is a variation pattern other than super reach β3 (step 079 SGS281; N), the process proceeds to step 079 SGS283, and when the variable display variation pattern is a super reach β3 variation pattern (step 079 SGS281; Y). ), The operation promotion effect determination process (step 079SGS282) for determining the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B during the execution of the fourth reach effect is executed, and the process proceeds to step 079SGS283. ..

In the operation promotion effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (A), when the variable display result is out of alignment, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect at a rate of 80% SS. It is determined to be -1, and the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%. When the variable display result is a big hit, the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, and to pattern SS-2 at a rate of 80%.

As shown in FIG. 9-17 (B), the operation promotion effect pattern SS-1 is an effect pattern for displaying the image of the push button 31B on the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, and is an operation promotion pattern. The effect pattern SS-2 is an effect pattern for displaying the image of the push button 31B in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 in a size larger than that of the pattern SS-1.

That is, as the operation promotion effect in the feature unit 079SG, when the image of the large size push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-2). In the case of), the ratio is higher than the case where the image of the push button 31B of a normal size is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (when the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-1). Since the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit (the big hit notification effect is executed) is high, the player is made to pay attention to the size of the image of the push button 31B displayed on the image display device 5 when the operation promotion effect is executed. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In step 079 SGS283, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not each effect such as the above-mentioned chance-up effect, still image display effect, and operation promotion effect is executed, and the effect control pattern (process table) according to the effect pattern and the variation pattern designation command. select. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 079 SGS284).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are sequentially arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (step 079SGS285). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (phone number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 079SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 079 SGS286). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 079 SGS287). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Every time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. The variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is realized by outputting the signal corresponding to the image data to the image display device 5 and displaying the image according to the signal by the image display device 5. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (step 079 SGS288).

In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts (-1) the value of the process timer each time the variable display effect process is executed, and the process timer after the subtraction is timered out. Determine if it has been done. Then, if the process timer after subtraction is not timer-out, the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer, and if the process timer after subtraction is timer-out, the process data The production device may be controlled according to the contents of the next process data by switching and starting the next process timer.

Next, an effect mode of variable display of super reach α1 to α3 and super reach β1 to β3 in the feature unit 079SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-18 to 9-35.

First, with respect to the variable display of super reach α1 to α3 shown in FIGS. 9-18, 9-19, 9-26 (A) to 9-26 (G), when the variable display is started, an image is displayed. In the first display area 079SG005F of the device 5, an effect moving image such as a variable display of a decorative pattern is started at V1 which is a normal traveling speed. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction (the progress speed of the moving image in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed in V3, which is the normal progress speed. At the same time, from the speakers 8L and 8R, the BGM, the effect sound, and the like corresponding to the variable display are started at the normal reproduction speed of V4.

Further, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, in the fourth symbol 079SG005J, the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005jb are started to be alternately lit (blinking) at a fixed cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 is started to blink at a fixed cycle. The lamp. Hereinafter, the blinking and lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in the feature unit 079SG means that the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are all synchronized and blinked and lit. The invention is not limited to this, and the blinking and lighting of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d do not necessarily have to be synchronized.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 9-18, 9-19, 9-26 (A) to 9-26 (C), when the development timing of the reach effect is reached due to the progress of the variable display, the first half of the reach effect is reached. During the execution period, the battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character A is started. As the battle effect progresses, when the latter half of the first half of the first reach effect execution period is approached, the display of a moving image in which the ally character A attacks the enemy character A is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. To. When the display of the moving image is started, the traveling speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from the above-mentioned V1 to V2 which is slower than the V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, it is displayed in slow motion that the ally character A hits the enemy character A.

During the period in which the ally character A attacks the enemy character A in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the video of the battle effect is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). Is executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3 without changing the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and BGM, production sound, etc. from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the playback speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

When the variable display is the variable display of the super reach α1, when the first half of the reach effect execution period ends, as shown in FIGS. 9-18 and 9-26 (E) to 9-26 (G). In addition, in the first display area 079SG005F, as a jackpot notification effect, after a video in which the attack of the ally character A is successful and the enemy character A collapses is displayed, the decorative symbol is stopped by the combination of jackpots and controlled to the jackpot game state. It is notified that it will be done. In particular, when the jackpot notification effect is started, the first hold storage display area 079SG005D, the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area are hidden. An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed with 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-26 (H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. Further, the display of the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination showing the jackpot of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the lighting display of the fourth symbol (the lighting display of both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb). ) Is performed.

During the jackpot notification effect, the moving image of the part where the attack of the ally character A is successful is displayed at V1 which is the normal progress speed (corresponding to FIG. 9-26 (E)), and the enemy character thereafter. The display of the moving image of the part where the character collapses is executed at the traveling speed V2, which is slower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 9-26 (F)). Then, the moving image of the portion where it is notified that the decorative symbol is stopped by the combination of big hits and controlled to the big hit game state is executed again at the normal progress speed V1 (FIG. 9-26 (G)). Applicable to).

During the jackpot notification effect, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of super reach α2 or super reach α3, when the first half of the first reach effect execution period ends, as shown in FIGS. 9-19 and 9-26 (D). , The attack of the ally character A is not successful, and the second half of the first reach effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 9-19 and 9-27 (A) to 9-27 (B), when the second half of the first reach effect is executed, the battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character A continues. proceed.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the production moving image of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. Further, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, directing sound, etc. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

In the latter half execution period of the first reach effect, when the effect movie of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V1, the chance-up effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 9-27 (B). .. The chance-up effect is executed at the progress speed V1 as in the effect movie of the battle effect.

As the battle effect progresses, when the latter half of the second half execution period of the first reach effect is approached, the display of a moving image in which the ally character A attacks the enemy character A is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. To. When the display of the moving image is started, the traveling speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from V1 to V2 which is slower than the V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, it is displayed in slow motion that the ally character A hits the enemy character A.

During the period in which the ally character A attacks the enemy character A in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the video of the battle effect is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). Is executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3 without changing the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and BGM, production sound, etc. from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the playback speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

When the variable display is the variable display of the super reach α2, as shown in FIGS. 9-19 and 9-27 (E) to 9-27 (G) when the second half execution period of the first reach effect is completed. In addition, in the first display area 079SG005F, as an out-of-order notification effect, after the attack of the ally character A fails and is defeated by the enemy character A, the decorative symbol stops with a combination of out-of-orders and the variable display result is out of order. Is notified.

During the missed notification effect, the moving image is displayed at V1 which is the normal progress speed in the part where the attack of the ally character A fails and the part where the variable display result is notified that the variable display result is missed. To.

Further, during the disengagement notification effect, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-27 (H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the detachment, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination indicating the detachment of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the extinguishing display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb) are turned off. ) Is performed.

On the other hand, when the variable display is the variable display of the super reach α3, as shown in FIGS. 9-20, 9-21 and 9-27 (D), the ally in the latter half execution period of the first reach effect. The attack of character A succeeds and defeats the enemy character A. Then, the first half of the second reach effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 9-20, 9-21 and 9-28 (A) to 9-28 (B), when the first half execution period of the second reach effect is entered, the ally character A and the enemy character B become Battle production progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the production moving image of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. Further, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, directing sound, etc. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

As the battle effect progresses, when the second half of the first half execution period of the second reach effect is approached, as shown in FIGS. 9-20, 9-21 and 9-28 (C), an image is displayed as an effect effect. The display of the concentrated line is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the display device 5, and the display of the moving image in which the ally character A attacks the enemy character B is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. When the display of the moving image is started, the traveling speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from V1 to V2 which is slower than the V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, it is displayed in slow motion that the ally character A hits the enemy character B.

During the period in which the ally character A attacks the enemy character B in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the video of the battle effect is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). Is executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3 without changing the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and BGM, production sound, etc. from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the playback speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternating blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened (the blinking cycle is shorter). It will be faster). Further, as shown in FIG. 9-28 (D), the number of concentrated lines as the above-mentioned effect effect is gradually increased and displayed.

That is, in the latter half execution period of the second reach effect, the progress speed of the video of the battle effect decreases to V2, so that the number of concentrated lines displayed in the first display area 079SG005F increases and the game effect lamp 9 blinks violently. Therefore, by increasing the number of concentrated lines and blinking the game effect lamp 9, it is possible to effectively draw the player's attention to the effect result of the battle effect (whether the jackpot notification effect or the out-of-order notification effect is executed). It is possible.

Then, after the second half of the reach effect execution period is completed, as shown in FIGS. 9-20, 9-21 and 9-28 (E), it is displayed at the end of the battle effect as a still image display effect. The image (the image immediately before the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B in the feature unit 079SG) is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F.

During the execution period of the still image display effect, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is switched from V1 to 0, but the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the telop from the left to the right The movement in the direction is executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3 without changing, and the BGM, the effect sound, and the like are output from the speakers 8L and 8R while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternating blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is the progress of the video of the battle effect. It returns to the cycle before the speed drops to V2.

When the pattern SG-2 is determined as the effect pattern of the still image display effect, as shown in FIGS. 9-29 (A) to 9-29 (E), the battle effect is performed as the still image display effect. The color of the image displayed at the end of is reversed. Then, after the end of the still image display effect in which the colors are reversed, as a jackpot notification effect, the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B, and after the enemy character B collapses, it is controlled to the jackpot game state. Be notified. In particular, when the decorative symbol stops in a combination indicating a big hit as the big hit notification effect, the first hold storage display area 079SG005D, the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden and the first display is made. An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-29 (F), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. Further, the display of the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination showing the jackpot of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the lighting display of the fourth symbol (the lighting display of both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb). ) Is performed.

As a jackpot notification effect when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SG-2, as shown in FIG. 9-20, a moving image in which the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B is performed at the progress speed V1. Although it is displayed, the moving image in which the enemy character B collapses is displayed at the progress speed V2. Then, the moving image in which the decorative symbol stops in the combination of big hits after the enemy character B collapses is displayed at the progress speed V1. In particular, when the decorative symbol stops in a combination indicating a big hit as the big hit notification effect, the first hold storage display area 079SG005D, the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden and the first display is made. An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa.

During the jackpot notification effect, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

On the other hand, when the pattern SG-1 is determined as the still image display effect, the color of the image displayed at the end of the battle effect is not reversed as the still image display effect, and FIG. 9-30 (A). )-As shown in FIGS. 9-30 (D), when the jackpot notification effect is executed as described above, and as shown in FIGS. 9-30 (F) to 9-30 (H), the miss notification is announced. The production may be executed.

The jackpot notification effect when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SG-1 is the same as the jackpot notification effect when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SG-2, as shown in FIG. 9-20. In addition, the moving image in which the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B is displayed at the progress speed V1, but the moving image in which the enemy character B collapses is displayed at the progress speed V2. Then, after the enemy character B collapses, it is displayed at the progress speed V1. During the jackpot notification effect, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-30 (E), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. Further, the display of the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination showing the jackpot of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the lighting display of the fourth symbol (the lighting display of both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb). ) Is performed.

Further, when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SG-1, the attack of the ally character A does not hit the enemy character B, and the attack of the enemy character B is conversely the attack of the ally character A. After a hit and the ally character A collapses, the decorative symbol stops in a combination of being off, and it is notified that the jackpot game state is not controlled.

As an out-of-order notification effect, as shown in FIG. 9-21, a moving image until the attack of the ally character A is not hit and is defeated by the enemy character B is displayed at the progress speed V1. During the disengagement notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-30 (I), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the detachment, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination indicating the detachment of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the extinguishing display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb) are turned off. ) Is performed.

Next, regarding the variable display of super reach β1 to β3 shown in FIGS. 9-22, 9-23, 9-31 (A) to 9-31 (H), when the variable display is started, the image In the first display area 079SG005F of the display device 5, an effect moving image such as a variable display of a decorative pattern is started at V1 which is a normal traveling speed. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction (the progress speed of the moving image in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed in V3, which is the normal progress speed. At the same time, from the speakers 8L and 8R, the BGM, the effect sound, and the like corresponding to the variable display are started at the normal reproduction speed of V4.

Further, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, in the fourth symbol 079SG005J, the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005jb are started to be alternately lit (blinking) at a fixed cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 is started to blink at a fixed cycle. The lamp.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 9-22, 9-23, 9-31 (A) to 9-31 (C), when the development timing of the reach effect is reached due to the progress of the variable display, the first half of the third reach effect is reached. During the execution period, the battle effect between the ally character B and the enemy character A is started. As the battle effect progresses, when the latter half of the first half execution period of the third reach effect is approached, the display of a moving image in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character A is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. To. When the display of the moving image is started, the traveling speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from the above-mentioned V1 to V2 which is slower than the V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, it is displayed in slow motion that the ally character B hits the enemy character A.

During the period in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character A in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the video of the battle effect is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). Is executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3 without changing the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and BGM, production sound, etc. from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the playback speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

When the variable display is the variable display of the super reach β1, when the first half execution period of the third reach effect ends, as shown in FIGS. 9-22 and 9-31 (E) to 9-31 (G). In the first display area 079SG005F, as a jackpot notification effect, it is notified that after a moving image in which the attack of the ally character B is successful and the enemy character A collapses is displayed, the control to the jackpot gaming state is performed. In particular, when the jackpot notification effect is started, the first hold storage display area 079SG005D, the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area are hidden. An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed with 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-31 (H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. Further, the display of the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination showing the jackpot of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the lighting display of the fourth symbol (the lighting display of both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb). ) Is performed.

During the jackpot notification effect, the video of the part where the attack of the ally character B succeeds is displayed at V1 which is the normal progress speed (corresponding to FIG. 9-30 (E)), and the enemy character thereafter. The display of the moving image of the part where the character collapses is executed at the traveling speed V2, which is slower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 9-30 (F)). Then, the moving image of the portion where it is notified that the decorative symbol is stopped by the combination of big hits and controlled to the big hit game state is executed again at the normal progress speed V1 (FIG. 9-30 (G)). Applicable to).

During the jackpot notification effect, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of super reach β2 or super reach β3, when the first half execution period of the third reach effect ends, as shown in FIGS. 9-23 and 9-31 (D). , The attack of the ally character B is not successful, and the second half of the third reach effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 9-23 and 9-32 (A) to 9-32 (B), when the second half execution period of the third reach effect is entered, the battle effect between the ally character B and the enemy character A continues. proceed.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the production moving image of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. Further, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, directing sound, etc. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

In the latter half execution period of the third reach effect, when the effect movie of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V1, the chance-up effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 9-32 (B). .. The chance-up effect is executed at the progress speed V1 as in the effect movie of the battle effect.

In particular, in the image display device 5, the small design is displayed with priority over the production video of the chance-up effect, while the production video of the chance-up effect is the image shown in the decorative design (FIGS. 9-32 (B)). It is displayed with priority over "7") displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display device 5. Therefore, in this feature unit 079SG, during the execution period of the chance-up effect, the player can recognize that the variable display is being performed by visually recognizing the small symbol, and display the effect video of the chance-up effect. By displaying the symbol with priority over the symbol, it is possible to surely secure an area for displaying the effect moving image of the chan-up effect in the image display device 5.

In the feature unit 079SG, the production video of the chance-up effect is displayed with priority over the decorative design, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative design is displayed from the production video of the chance-up effect. May be displayed with priority. By doing so, the player can easily recognize which combination of decorative symbols the reach effect during execution has evolved from, so that the game interest can be improved.

As the battle effect progresses, when the latter half of the second half execution period of the first reach effect is approached, the display of a moving image in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character A is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. To. When the display of the moving image is started, the traveling speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from V1 to V2 which is slower than the V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, it is displayed in slow motion that the ally character B hits the enemy character A.

During the period in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character A in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the video of the battle effect is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). Is executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3 without changing the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and BGM, production sound, etc. from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the playback speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

When the variable display is the variable display of the super reach β2, as shown in FIGS. 9-23 and 9-32 (E) to 9-32 (G) when the second half execution period of the third reach effect is completed. In the first display area 079SG005F, as an out-of-order notification effect, it is notified that the variable display result is out of alignment after the attack of the ally character B fails and the enemy character A defeats it.

During the missed notification effect, the moving image is displayed at V1 which is the normal progress speed in the part where the attack of the ally character B fails and the part where the variable display result is notified that the variable display result is missed. To.

Further, during the disengagement notification effect, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-32 (H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the detachment, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination indicating the detachment of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the extinguishing display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb) are turned off. ) Is performed.

On the other hand, when the variable display is the variable display of the super reach β3, as shown in FIGS. 9-24, 9-25 and 9-32 (D), the ally in the latter half execution period of the third reach effect. The attack of character B succeeds and defeats enemy character A. Then, the first half of the fourth reach effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 9-24, 9-25, and 9-33 (A) to 9-33 (B), when the first half execution period of the fourth reach effect is entered, the ally character AB and the enemy character B The battle production progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the production moving image of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. Further, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, directing sound, etc. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

As the battle effect progresses, the latter half of the first half execution period of the fourth reach effect is approached, and as shown in FIGS. 9-24, 9-25 and 9-33 (C), the image display device 5 In the first display area 079SG005F, the display of the moving image in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character B is started. When the display of the moving image is started, the traveling speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from V1 to V2 which is slower than the V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, it is displayed in slow motion that the ally character B hits the enemy character B.

During the period in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character B in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the video of the battle effect is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). Is executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3 without changing the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and BGM, production sound, etc. from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the playback speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternating blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened (the blinking cycle is shorter). It will be faster).

That is, in the latter half execution period of the fourth reach effect, the game effect lamp 9 blinks violently as the progress speed of the video of the battle effect decreases to V2, so that the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 causes the battle effect. It is possible to effectively draw the player's attention to the effect result (whether the jackpot notification effect or the out-of-order notification effect is executed).

Then, as the latter half of the fourth reach effect progresses, the operation promotion effect is executed. When the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect is determined to be the pattern SS-1, the push button 31B together with the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba that imitates the shape of the push button 31B in the center of the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. The display of the meter 079SG005M and the effect image 079SG005E suggesting the operation acceptance period of the meter 079SG005M is started, and the update display of the meter 079SG005M and the enlarged update display of the effect image 079SG005E toward the peripheral edge of the image display device 5 are started. As described above, since the images of these operation promotion effects are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on the image data 2 (see FIG. 9-3), they are constant regardless of the progress speed of the battle effects. It is displayed as a moving speed video.

As shown in FIG. 9-33 (D), during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B can be notified to the player by the update display of the meter 079SG005M, while the effect image 079SG005E is enlarged. The update display progresses. Since the effect image 079SG005E has a predetermined transmittance (for example, 10% to 50%), the player can visually recognize the battle effect through the effect image 079SG005E, and when the operation promotion effect is not executed. The visibility of the battle effect is lower than that. Since the execution period of the operation promotion effect is included in the latter half of the fourth reach effect, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2 even during the execution of the operation promotion effect.

As shown in FIGS. 9-33 (D) and 9-33 (E), the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, but the end timing (push) of the operation promotion effect. At the time of the end timing of the operation reception of the button 31B), the scene does not proceed until it is known whether or not the attack of the ally character B hits the enemy character B, that is, the jackpot notification effect or the miss notification effect is not started. It has become.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9-34 (A) to 9-34 (E), when the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect is determined to be the pattern SS-2, the first display of the image display device 5 In the center of the area 079SG005F, as an operation promotion image imitating the shape of the push button 31B, the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, which is larger in size than the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba, and the meter 079SG005M suggesting the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B are displayed. Then, the update display of the meter 079SG005M is started. As described above, since the images of these operation promotion effects are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on the image data 2 (see FIG. 9-3), they are constant regardless of the progress speed of the battle effects. It is displayed as a moving speed video.

As shown in FIG. 9-34 (D), during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B can be notified to the player by the update display of the meter 079SG005M, while the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb makes it possible to notify the player. Most of the images of the battle production are hidden. As described above, the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is an image having a size larger than that of the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and having a transmittance of 0%. Therefore, when the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-2, the visibility of the battle effect is lower than that in the case where the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-1. Since the execution period of the operation promotion effect is included in the latter half of the fourth reach effect, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2 even during the execution of the operation promotion effect.

As shown in FIGS. 9-34 (D) and 9-34 (E), the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, but the end timing (push) of the operation promotion effect. At the time of the end timing of the operation reception of the button 31B), the scene does not proceed to the scene where it is known whether or not the attack of the ally character B hits the enemy character B, that is, the jackpot notification effect or the miss notification effect is not started. It has become.

Then, when the player operates the push button 31B during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, or when the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B (the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is set). When it ends), the jackpot notification effect or the miss notification effect is executed from the timing when the players operate the push button 31B or the timing when the operation promotion effect ends.

As a big hit notification effect after the operation promotion effect, as shown in FIGS. 9-24 and 9-35 (A) to 9-35 (C), a moving image in which the attack of the ally character B hits the enemy character B is Although it is displayed at the progress speed V1, the moving image in which the enemy character B collapses is displayed at the progress speed V2. Then, the moving image after the enemy character B has fallen is displayed at the progress speed V1. During the jackpot notification effect, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-35 (D), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. Further, the display of the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination showing the jackpot of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the lighting display of the fourth symbol (the lighting display of both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb). ) Is performed.

Further, as the disengagement notification effect after the operation promotion effect, as shown in FIGS. 9-25 and 9-35 (E) to 9-35 (G), the attack of the ally character B hits the enemy character B. On the contrary, after the attack of the enemy character B hits the ally character B and the ally character B collapses, it is notified that the jackpot game state is not controlled. In particular, when the disengagement notification effect is executed, the first hold storage display area 079SG005D, the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area are hidden. An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed with 079SG005Sa.

As the missed notification effect, as shown in FIGS. 9-25, a moving image until the attack of the ally character B does not hit and the decorative symbol stops due to the combination of missed is displayed at the traveling speed V1. During the disengagement notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-35 (H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the detachment, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination indicating the detachment of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the extinguishing display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb) are turned off. ) Is performed.

9-26 (H), 9-27 (H), 10-29 (F), 9-30 (E), 9-30 (I), 9-31 (H), FIG. As shown in 9-32 (H), 9-35 (D), and 9-35 (H), in the feature unit 079SG, a telop (message) is displayed on the image display device 5 at the end timing of the variable display. The form in which the telop display area 079SG005T including the telop display area 079SG005T is displayed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and at the end timing of the variable display, the display itself of the telop display area 079SG005T on the image display device 5 is displayed. On the other hand, the display of the telop (message) in the telop display area 079SG005T itself may not be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, in the variable display of the super reach α3 and the super reach β3, the game effect lamp 9 is used only during the slow motion period immediately before the notification effect (the period during which the display of the effect movie of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2). Although the embodiment of shortening the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened in a slow motion period other than immediately before the notification effect. Further, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened even in a part of the period (non-slow motion period) in which the display of the effect moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V1.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 9-19 to 9-25, each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect. During the first half execution period, the moving image of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1, and the latter half of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect. During the partial execution period, the moving image of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2. Therefore, while the moving image of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2, the degree of emotional transfer of the player to the ally character displayed during the reach effect is increased, and the jackpot notification is given. Since it is possible to raise the expectation that the production will be executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. On the other hand, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach production, the second reach production, the third reach production, and the fourth reach production, BGM and production sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R are produced. Since the output remains unchanged at V4, which is the normal playback speed, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort.

Further, since the sound output hand in the feature unit 079SG includes the voice synthesis IC 079SG132, the amplifier circuit 079SG134, and the speakers 8L and 8R, the reproducibility is achieved during variable display including execution of reach effect and execution of jackpot game. It is possible to output high-quality BGM (musical music), sound effects, and other directing sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R at an appropriate volume, which makes it possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-20, 9-21, 9-24, and 9-25, the game effect is exhibited during the second half execution period of the second reach effect and the second half execution period of the fourth reach effect. Since the lamp 9 blinks at a shorter cycle than usual, the effect can be improved by blinking the game effect lamp 9 at a shorter cycle during the period when the progress speed of the effect moving image is V2.

In the feature unit 079SG, a mode in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the second half execution period of the reach effect and the second half execution period of the fourth reach effect is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. The blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be gradually shortened according to the progress of the second reach effect and the fourth reach effect. By doing so, the player can recognize that the notification effect will be executed soon by the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, the feature unit 079SG exemplifies a mode in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the second half execution period of the reach effect and the second half execution period of the fourth reach effect, but the present invention is limited to this. The blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be executed at any timing from the first reach effect to the fourth reach effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-19 to 9-25, the progress of the effect video of the reach effect during each execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect. While the speed changes between V1 and V2, the rotation speed of the hold display and the moving speed of the telop are both constant at V3, and the reproduction speed of the production sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is constant at V4. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort.

The feature unit 079SG exemplifies a mode in which both the rotation speed of the hold display and the movement display speed of the telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa are V3, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The rotation speed of the hold display and the movement display speed of the telop may be different speeds as long as they are constant regardless of the progress of each reach effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-2 (A), the area of the first display area 079SG005F is larger than the combined area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. During execution, the player can more easily recognize the reach effect displayed on the first display area 079SG005F than the hold display or telop displayed on the second display area 079SG005Sa, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-18 to 9-25, the rotation display of the hold display is the rotation speed V3 in the first hold storage display area 079SG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U during the period other than the reach effect. In the telop display area 079SG005T, the telop movement display is executed at the movement speed V3, that is, the rotation display of the hold display and the telop movement display are executed at the same speed as during the reach production, so that the player can perform the telop movement display. It is possible to prevent these pending displays and telops from becoming difficult to recognize.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-2 (C), the characters included in the telop (message) in the telop display area 079SG005T reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T, and at the same time the display ends, the telop display area is displayed. Since it is displayed again at the left end of the 079SG005T and moved from the left to the right again, the entire telop (message) is always displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T. Therefore, the player can always recognize the entire movement display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T.

The feature unit 079SG illustrates a form in which the entire telop is always moved and displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the telop display area 079SG005T moves. Some of the displayed telops may be invisible to the player at some time.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-20, 9-21, and 9-28, during the second half execution period of the reach effect, the effect movie of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2 and the image is displayed. By executing the effect effect of displaying the concentrated line on the display device 5, the effect effect of the second half of the reach effect can be enhanced by the effect effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved. In particular, in this feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 9-28 (C) and 1-28 (D), the number of concentrated lines displayed increases as the battle effect progresses, so that the concentrated lines are displayed. It is possible for the player to more easily recognize that the second reach effect is completed and the jackpot notification effect or the miss notification effect is executed due to the increase in the number.

The feature unit 079SG exemplifies a form in which the effect effect in the present invention is displayed as a concentrated line, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation of the movable body 32 within a predetermined range, the speaker 8L, and the like. The output of the specific sound effect from 8R, the vibration of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, the vibration of the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the image display device 5 itself, etc. are executed as the effect effect, and the second reach effect ( As the battle effect progresses, the effect level of the effect effect is gradually increased (for example, the operating range of the movable body 32 is widened, the volume of the specific sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R is increased, and the stick. The vibration of the controller 31A and the push button 31B may be increased, the vibration of the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the image display device 5 itself may be increased, and the like).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-26 (G), 9-29 (E), 9-30 (D), 9-31 (G), and 9-35 (C), as a jackpot notification effect. When the decorative symbol is stopped by the combination of big hits, the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa are hidden and the first display area 079SG005F is displayed. Since the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the player is made to recognize that the jackpot gaming state is controlled while further improving the visibility of the jackpot notification effect in the second display area 079SG005Sa. It can be done easily.

When executing the jackpot notification effect, the feature unit 079SG hides the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa. The first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa exemplify a mode in which the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second display area 079SG005Sa is used. In a state where the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are displayed, the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa (No. 2 In the display area 079SG005Sa, the image of the jackpot notification effect may be displayed overlapping with the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T).

At this time, the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are transparently displayed or reduced, or the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U are displayed. The visibility of the jackpot notification image may be improved by hiding only one of the hold display displayed in the hold display area.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-28 and 9-29, during the second half execution period of the reach effect, the still image display effect can be executed in the first display area 079SG005F, while the still image display effect can be executed in FIGS. 9-20 and 9-20. As shown in 9-21, during the still image display effect execution period, the rotation display of the hold display in the first hold storage display area 079SG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and FIG. 9-2. Since the telop movement display in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in (C) continues without stopping, the hold display is being displayed and the telop movement display is being displayed during the execution period of the still image display effect. Can be easily recognized by the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the display of the hold display and the display of the telop by stopping the rotation display of the hold display and the movement display of the telop. ..

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-16 and 9-29 (A) to 9-29 (B), when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SG-2, the colors of the still image are reversed. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the still image display effect is executed by reversing the color of the still image.

In the feature unit 079SG, as a still image display effect, as a form of changing the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, a form of reversing the color of the still image is illustrated. The form of changing the color of the still image is not limited to that of changing the color of the still image to black and white, changing only a part of the color of the still image, and adding a new color to the still image. It may be added.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-29 (B), when the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is reversed by executing the still image display effect in the pattern SG-2, Since the colors of the hold display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the color of the fourth symbol displayed in the third display area 079SG005Sb are not inverted, the player is displayed in these second display areas 079SG005Sa. By comparing the hold display, telop, fourth symbol, etc. with the still image, it is possible to easily recognize that the color of the still image has changed.

In addition, in each variable display of the super reach in this feature unit 079SG, a pattern that shifts to the second reach effect or the fourth reach effect after the execution of the first reach effect or the third reach effect, and the first reach effect or the third reach effect. Since there is a pattern in which the variable display that shifts to the second reach production and the fourth reach production ends after the production is executed, the display of the production video of the reach production progresses during the first reach production and the third reach production. Whether or not to shift to the second reach effect or the fourth reach effect after being executed at the speed V2, and the display of the effect video of the reach effect during the second reach effect or the third reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it is notified that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state after the game is played, the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-19, 9-20, 9-21, 9-23, 9-24, and 9-25, the first reach effect and the third reach effect are performed during the first reach effect. During the 1st reach production second half execution period and the 3rd reach production second half execution period, the production in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character and the 1st reach production second half execution period or the 3rd reach production second half execution period proceed at the same time. Since it is executed at speed V1, the progress speed when shifting from the first reach effect first half execution period to the first reach effect second half execution period or from the third reach effect first half execution period to the third reach effect second half execution period. However, in the second half of the first reach effect and the second half of the third reach effect, the expectation that the ally character will be controlled to the jackpot game state by being different from the progress speed of the effect of being defeated by the enemy character is excessively raised. It can be prevented from being lost. Further, FIGS. 9-18, 9-20, 9-22, 9-24, 9-25 and 9-26 (E) to 9-26 (G), 9-29 (C). 9-29 (E), 9-30 (B) to 9-30 (D), 9-31 (E) to 9-31 (G), 9-35 (A) to As shown in 9-35 (C), in the jackpot notification effect of this feature unit 079SG, while the video is displayed at the progress speed V2 when the enemy character collapses due to the hit of the attack of the ally character, while it is executed. 9-19, 9-21, 9-23, 9-25 and 9-27 (E) to 9-27 (G), 9-30 (F) to 9-30 (H). ), FIGS. 9-32 (E) to 9-32 (G), and 9-35 (D) to 9-35 (F). Since the display of is executed at the progress speed V1, when the disengagement notification effect is executed, the display of the effect video of the disengagement notification effect is not executed at the progress speed V2, so that the player is dissatisfied. Can be prevented from increasing excessively, and the game entertainment can be improved.

In addition, in the present feature unit 079SG, when the variable display result of the super reach is the deviation notification effect, the display of the effect video of the deviation notification effect is executed at the progress speed V1. The present invention is not limited to this, and in a part of the variable display of the super reach, the display of the effect moving image of the out-of-order notification effect may be executed at a progress speed V2 slower than V1. By doing so, it is possible to create variations in the production of the out-of-court notification effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the feature unit 079SG, the mode in which the traveling speed V1 of the production moving image during the jackpot notification effect is the third speed in the present invention and the traveling speed V2 of the effecting moving image during the jackpot notification effect is the fourth speed in the present invention is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the traveling speed V1. Further, the fourth speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the traveling speed V2 as long as it is slower than the third speed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-24 and 9-25, the operation promotion effect is executed when the display of the video of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2 during the latter half execution period of the fourth reach effect. Therefore, the effect of the fourth reach effect can be enhanced by the operation promotion effect.

It should be noted that the feature unit 079SG exemplifies a mode in which the display of the effect moving image of the fourth reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2 during the execution of the operation promotion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. During the execution of the operation promotion effect, the display of the effect moving image of the fourth reach effect may be executed at the progress speed V1. Further, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect suggesting that the operation promotion effect is executed before the operation promotion effect is executed, and during the execution period of the suggestion effect, the effect video of the fourth reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. It may be executed.

Further, as the operation promotion effect of the feature unit 079SG, in addition to the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, the meter 079SG005M for notifying the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F. While the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb and the meter 079SG005M are being displayed, the display of the effect video of the fourth reach effect at the progress speed V2 is continuously executed, but the notification effect is not progressed. .. Further, when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, and when the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B. Then, the same jackpot notification effect or miss notification effect is executed. Therefore, since the notification effect is not executed at the timing before the end of the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B (until the end of the operation promotion effect), the push button is not operated by the player. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing whether or not the push button 31B is controlled to the jackpot game state during the operation acceptance period.

The feature unit 079SG exemplifies a mode in which the detection means in the present invention is a push button 31B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the detection means is other than the push button 31B such as the stick controller 31A. In addition to the operation means of the above, sensors such as a motion sensor and a touch sensor that can detect the movement of the player may be used.

Further, FIGS. 9-18, 9-20, 9-22, 9-24, 9-26 (E) to 9-26 (G), 9-29 (C) to 9-29. (E), FIGS. 9-30 (B) to 9-30 (D), 9-31 (E) to 9-31 (G), 9-35 (A) to 9-35C). As shown, in the jackpot notification effect in the feature unit 079SG, the video of the part where the attack of the ally character hits the enemy character is displayed at the progress speed V1, while the video of the part where the enemy character collapses is the progress speed V2. It is displayed in. On the other hand, FIGS. 9-19, 9-21, 9-23, 9-25 and 9-27 (E) to 9-27 (G), 9-30 (E) to 9- As shown in 30 (G), FIGS. 9-32 (E) to 9-32 (G), and 9-35 (D) to 9-35 (F), the disengagement notification effect of the feature unit 079SG is produced. The moving image is displayed at the progress speed V1 and is not displayed at the progress speed V2. That is, when the jackpot notification effect is executed, the player can be impressed that the jackpot gaming state is controlled by displaying a part of the effect movie of the jackpot notification effect at the progress speed V2. it can.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as a special effect that can be executed only when the variable display result is a big hit in the present invention, the still image display effect can be executed by the pattern SG-2 (still image display effect in which the colors are inverted). Therefore, as a still image display effect, the player can pay attention to whether or not the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is reversed, so that the game interest can be improved.

In the feature unit 079SG, a mode in which the still image display effect of the pattern SG-2 is a special effect in the present invention is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special effect in the present invention is not limited to this. , An effect other than the still image display effect of the pattern SG-2 (for example, an effect in which a specific character is displayed, an effect in which the color of the effect is gold or rainbow color, etc.) may be executed.

Further, the operation promotion effect of the feature unit 079SG mimics the pattern SS-1 in which the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba imitating the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the push button 31B in the first display area 079SG005F. It can be executed by any effect pattern of the pattern SS-2 in which the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, which is larger in size than the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba, is displayed as the operation promotion image. When the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-1, the battle effect of the fourth reach effect can be visually recognized through the effect image 079SG005E displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, while the battle effect of the fourth reach effect can be visually recognized in the pattern SS-2. When the operation promotion effect is executed, most of the battle effect of the fourth reach effect is hidden by the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba, so that the operation promotion effect is the first as compared with the case where the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-1. The visibility of the battle production of 4 reach production is low. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-17, the ratio at which the variable display result becomes a big hit when the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 is when the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-1. Since the variable display result is lower than the jackpot ratio, the player can pay attention to whether the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-1 or the pattern SS-2, and the game interest can be improved. Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-24, 9-25 and 9-33 (C) to 9-33 (E), when the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed as the operation promotion effect, the operation promotion image is displayed. While the 079SG005Ba is being displayed, the display of the production video of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V2, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

In the feature unit 079SG, when the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-2, the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is displayed on the image display device 5, and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb causes the traveling speed V2 (slow motion). ) Has illustrated a form in which the visibility of the production video (battle production) of the fourth reach effect is reduced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is the pattern SS. When executed in -2, in addition to the display of the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, a dedicated background image is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that the production video (battle) of the fourth reach effect is displayed. The production) may be completely invisible. In addition, during the period when the production video (battle production) of the 4th reach production is completely invisible due to the background image dedicated to the operation promotion production pattern SS-2, the production video of the 4th reach production The display may be executed at the traveling speed V1 (non-slow motion).

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as the reach effect of the super reach, the second reach effect can be executed after the first reach effect, and the fourth reach effect can be executed after the third reach effect. Further, as the variable display of the super reach, the variable display of the super reach α1 that notifies the big hit after the first half execution period of the first reach effect and the variable display of the super reach β1 that notifies the big hit after the first half execution period of the third reach effect. Display, variable display of super reach α2 that executes the first half of the first reach effect and then the second half of the first reach effect to notify the deviation, and the second half of the third reach after the first half of the third reach effect. Variable display of super reach β2 that executes the partial execution period and notifies the deviation, variable display of super reach α3 that shifts to the second reach effect after the first reach effect exchange, third reach effect exchange partial execution period It is possible to execute the variable display of the super reach α3 that shifts to the fourth reach effect after, and as shown in FIGS. 9-18 to 9-25, the first half of the first reach effect and the second half of the first reach effect. When shifting to the execution period, when shifting from the first reach effect second half execution period to the second reach effect first half execution period, when shifting from the third reach effect first half execution period to the third reach effect second half execution period , When shifting from the third reach production second half execution period to the fourth reach production first half execution period, the production video of each reach production is executed at the progress speed V2, and the first reach production first half execution period is started. When shifting to the second half of the reach effect execution period, when shifting from the second half of the reach effect to the first half of the second reach effect, the first half of the third reach effect to the second half of the third reach effect When shifting from the third reach production second half execution period to the fourth reach production first half execution period, BGM and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the same playback speed V4 as in other periods. Therefore, when shifting from the first reach effect first half execution period to the first reach effect second half execution period, when shifting from the first reach effect second half execution period to the second reach effect first half execution period, the third reach When shifting from the first half of the production period to the second half of the third reach production, and when shifting from the second half of the third reach production to the first half of the fourth reach production, the player feels uncomfortable. It can be prevented from being stored. Further, by displaying the effect video of each reach effect at the progress speed V2, it is possible to easily recognize the branch of the reach effect drawn by the player.

The variable display of the super reach of the feature unit 079SG exemplifies a mode in which two reach effects can be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display of the super reach is 3 or more. The reach effect may be executable, or only one reach effect may be executable.

Although the feature portion 079SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these feature portions, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. included.

For example, in the feature unit 079SG, a first reach effect, a second reach effect, a third reach effect, and a fourth reach effect are provided as the reach effect of the super reach, and a part of the effect movie of the reach effect is provided in all of these reach effects. Although the embodiment in which the display of the above is executed at the progress speed V2 (slow motion) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display of the production moving image is not executed at the progress speed V2 in each reach effect ( A pattern in which the display of the production moving image is always executed at the progress speed V1) and a pattern in which a part of the production movie is displayed at the progress speed V2 may be provided. Further, the effect contents may be different between the reach effect in which a part of the effect moving image is displayed at the progress speed V2 and the reach effect in which the display of the effect moving image is not executed at the progress speed V2. By doing so, it is possible to create variations in the reach production of the super reach, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, the production sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R always has a constant playback speed (reproduction speed V4) regardless of whether or not the display of the production video is executed at the progress speed V2. Although the output form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, as the modified example 079SG-1, the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach are shown. In the first half of each reach production second half of the production, the playback speed V4 from the speakers 8L, 8R as in the first half of each reach production of 1 reach production, 2nd reach production, 3rd reach production, and 4th reach production. While the production sound is output at, what is V4 in the latter half of each reach production (slow motion period) of the first reach production, the second reach production, the third reach production, and the fourth reach production? The production sound may be output at a different reproduction speed (for example, V5 slower than the reproduction speed V4). By doing so, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect sound on the reach effect by making the reproduction speed of the effect sound different while the display of the effect video of the reach effect is being executed at the progress speed V2. You can improve your interest.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 9-33 and 9-34, the first display area 079SG005F is visually recognized during the execution period of the reach effect by displaying the effect image 079SG005E and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb. The present invention exemplifies a form in which the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb cannot be reduced while the property can be reduced, but the present invention is not limited thereto. As a modification 079SG-2, it may be possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

Further, when it is possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb in this way, as shown in FIGS. 9-36 and 9-37, after the end of the reach effect. , The visibility of the first display area 079SG005F may be reduced as a part of the notification effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-36 (A) to 9-36 (D), when the second reach effect is executed, when the second reach effect is completed together with the still image display effect, A circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is enlarged and displayed toward the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb as a part of the jackpot notification effect or the loss notification effect. To go. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is concealed by the effect image 079SG005Ea), it is shown in FIGS. 9-36 (E) and 9-36 (F). As described above, it is sufficient to notify that the jackpot gaming state is controlled as the jackpot notification effect, or that the jackpot gaming state is not controlled as the loss notification effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-37 (A) to 9-37 (D), when the fourth reach effect is executed, the player operates the push button 31B, or the player pushes. When the operation promotion effect is completed without operating the button 31B, a circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area and the effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed second as part of the jackpot notification effect or the loss notification effect. Enlarged display is performed toward the area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is concealed by the effect image 079SG005Ea), it is shown in FIGS. 9-37 (E) and 9-37 (F). As described above, it is sufficient to notify that the jackpot gaming state is controlled as the jackpot notification effect, or that the jackpot gaming state is not controlled as the loss notification effect.

The effect image 079SG005Ea shown in FIGS. 9-36 and 9-37 is an image based on the image data 2 shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), and the drawing range is expanded as an image based on the image data 2. Therefore, it is possible to reduce only the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F and not to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

As described above, in the present modification 079SG-2, the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be changed, while the second display area 9-36 and 9-37 show the second display area. After the end of the reach effect or after the end of the fourth reach effect, the effect image 079SG005Ea reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F, but the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. Does not change, so that the player can easily recognize the timing when the notification effect is set by changing the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F, and the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be improved. Since it does not change, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the hold display, the telop display, the variable display of the fourth symbol, and the like.

Further, the effect image 079SG005Ea that reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is an image drawn as an image of the second image data shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), and is the second display area 079SG005Sa or the third. Since the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is changed by drawing so as to enlarge the display toward the display area 079SG005Sb, the first display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb are not changed. Only the visibility of the display area 079SG005F can be accurately reduced, and the drawing of the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea as the second image data can be drawn from the center of the first display area 079SG005F to the second display area 079SG005Sa or the third display. Since the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is lowered by executing toward the area 079SG005Sb, it is possible to make it difficult to change the visibility of the area corresponding to the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

Further, in the present modification 079SG-2, a mode in which the operation promotion effect is executed during the fourth reach effect is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is one of the notification effects. It may be executed as a part.

When the operation promotion effect is executed as a part of the notification effect, it is the same as the modified example 079SG-2 as shown in FIGS. 9-38 (A) to 9-38 (F) as the modified example 079SG-3. In addition, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by enlarging the effect image 079SG005Ea. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F, as shown in FIG. 9-38 (D), the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M are displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F as an operation promotion effect. To do.

By displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M as images based on the first image data shown in FIG. 9-2 (A), it is possible to avoid deterioration of visibility due to the effect image 079SG005Ea.

After that, the player operates the push button 31B, or the player is controlled to the jackpot game state based on the end of the operation promotion effect without operating the push button 31B, or the jackpot game state. Is notified that it is not controlled.

As described above, in the present modification 079SG-3, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is lowered by the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea, but the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M displayed as the image of the first image data. Since the visibility of the push button 31B is not lowered, the operation promotion effect can be made to stand out with respect to the fourth reach effect, so that the player can be effectively encouraged to operate the push button 31B.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach effect, the variable display result is always a big hit. The present invention is not limited to this, and as the modified example 079SG-4, when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach effect, the jackpot type of the jackpot is always specified. The probability variation jackpot (furthermore, the probability variation jackpot A that is most advantageous to the player) may be set. Furthermore, as an effect pattern when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach effect, the jackpot game state is controlled again after the disconnection notification effect is once executed. It may be possible to execute a revival effect that notifies. In the case where the revival effect is executed after the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 in this way, the big hit type is a probable big hit and a non-probable big hit (non-probable big hit). A case where the game is controlled to the jackpot game state and a case where the probability variation jackpot is controlled to the jackpot game state) may be provided. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the jackpot notification effect is executed after the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2, so that the game interest can be improved. ..

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as a telop displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, a mode in which a message indicating a game state is displayed is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the telop display area 079SG005T is not limited to this. As the displayed telop, even if it is possible to display a message suggesting whether or not the variable display being executed or the variable display that has not been started is controlled to the jackpot game state, the title of the reach effect being executed, and the like can be displayed. Good.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, a form in which a telop can be displayed according to the state of the effect being executed is illustrated in the telop display area 079SG005T, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the telop display area 079SG005T is not limited thereto. The telops displayed in are those that can identify the game state, the degree of expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit in the variable display during execution (big hit expectation), the explanation of the effect during execution (especially the reach effect), and the reach effect. It may be a notice effect or the like that can be executed from a timing earlier than that.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 9-33 and 9-34, the operation promotion effect (operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and operation promotion) is performed during the period during which the moving image of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. Although the mode of executing the image 079SG005Bb) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is executed after the moving image of the reach effect returns from the progress speed V2 to the progress speed V1. May be good.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-33 and 9-34, the feature unit 079SG exemplifies a mode in which the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb are displayed on the image display device 5 as the operation promotion effect. The present invention is not limited to this, and as the operation promotion effect, not only the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb are displayed, but also the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb are displayed, for example. As an effect before displaying, the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B move toward the center of the image display device 5, and finally the images of the push buttons 31B are duplicated and displayed to promote the operation. You may execute the effect that 079SG005Ba and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb are displayed.

When the effect of moving the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B toward the center of the image display device 5 is executed as a precursor effect of the operation promotion effect, for example, the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B are displayed. The moving display speed of the image display device 5 may decrease as it approaches the central portion of the image display device 5. By doing so, the player can accurately recognize that the operation promotion effect is executed, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 9-20, 9-21, 9-24, and 9-25, when the display of the moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2, Although the embodiment in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. When the display of the reach effect video is executed at the progress speed V2, the number of colors (emission colors) of the game effect lamp 9 is different from that when the reach effect video display is executed at the progress speed V1. You may. For example, when the display of the reach effect video is executed at the progress speed V1, the game effect lamp 9 can emit light in a plurality of colors, while the display of the reach effect video is executed at the progress speed V2. In this case, the game effect lamp 9 may be capable of emitting light in a single color (for example, only white). By doing so, when the display of the moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2, it is possible to prevent the game enjoyment from being lowered due to the emission color of the game effect lamp 9.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 9-20, 9-21, 9-24, and 9-25, when the display of the moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2, Although the embodiment in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. When the display of the moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be lengthened. By doing so, it is possible to give a sense of unity between the display of the video of the reach effect and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 9-26, 9-29, 9-30, 9-31, and 9-35, the reach effect is finished as the effect mode of the jackpot notification effect. Later, a form in which the decorative symbol is displayed while swinging with a combination indicating a jackpot is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative symbol is displayed while swinging with a combination indicating a jackpot. The timing may be during the reach production.

Further, the present invention is a gaming machine in which a player can select at least a part of production sounds such as BGM output from speakers 8L and 8R during a game by operating an operating means that can be operated by the player. May be applied to. By doing so, when the player sets the output of the effect sound that suits his / her own taste, the speaker 8L is displayed when the display of the moving image of each reach effect is executed at the progress speed V1. , Since the effect sound output from 8R is reproduced at the reproduction speed V4 without changing, the effect sound is reproduced from the reproduction speed V4 even though the player himself selects the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. However, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest due to the low-speed playback.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as the end suggestion effect in the present invention, it is possible to execute an effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character in the first reach effect second half execution period and the third reach effect second half execution period. Although the variable display result is always out of alignment when is executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the first reach effect second half execution period and the third reach effect second half execution period. After the effect that the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed, the display on the image display device 5 is once switched to the display of the normal background image before the reach effect, and then the effect indicating that the variable display result is a big hit. A case may be provided in which (for example, a resurrection effect) is executed.

When the revival effect is executed in this way, the revival effect is performed for the player by lighting and blinking the game effect lamp 9 before displaying the moving image of the revival effect on the image display device 5. May be made aware that is executed. Further, as an effect mode of the revival effect, for example, the ally character may attack the enemy character again and defeat the enemy character. In particular, when executing the resurrection effect, a part of the video of the resurrection effect (for example, a video of a scene in which an enemy character collapses) is displayed at a progress speed of V2 so as to enhance the effect of the resurrection effect. May be good.

Further, although a plurality of feature portions and modified examples are disclosed in the present specification, the gaming machine of the present invention is implemented by combining two or more feature portions and modified examples from these plurality of feature portions and modified examples. You may.

For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 079SG may be a pachinko gaming machine whose jackpot probability can be changed by changing the set values as shown in FIGS. 1 to 9. In such a case, for example, in the variable display of the super reach α1 and the super reach β1, a pattern is provided in which the variable display result is out of alignment, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a high setting value (for example, 6) that is advantageous for the player. When is set, even if the variable display result is out of order in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1 at a higher rate than when other set values are set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Good. By doing so, the fact that the variable display result is out of alignment in the variable display of the super reach α1 and the super reach β1 can be used as a suggestion that the high setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the variable display result is out of order while suppressing the deterioration of the player's interest due to the variable display result being out of place in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1. It will be possible.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, the pachinko game machine 1 is exemplified as a game machine that plays a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game machine that plays a predetermined game is at least a predetermined game. Other than the pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine or a general game machine may be used as long as it performs the above.

As described above, the feature unit 079SG includes the following inventions.
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
Sound output means capable of outputting the production sound (for example, the voice synthesis IC 079SG132, the voice data ROM 079SG133, and the amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L, 8R and the voice control board 13).
A display means capable of displaying a production video (for example, an image display device 5) and
An effect executing means (for example, a reach effect) capable of displaying a character's effect moving image on the display means and outputting an effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the character's effect moving image (for example, reach effect). CPU120 for production control) and
With
The effect executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, the effect moving speed in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach The part in which the moving image of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the first half execution period of each of the effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the effect moving speed at which the progress speed of the effect is slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIG. 10). As shown in -19 to 10-25, the moving speed of each reach effect is V2 during the latter half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect. The part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 10-). As shown in FIGS. 19 to 10-25, the speakers 8L and 8R during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, respectively. The part where BGM, production sound, etc. are output at V4, which is the normal playback speed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the progress speed of the production video of the predetermined production changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the production sound corresponding to the predetermined production does not change between the first period and the second period. , It is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort.

The configuration shown by the feature unit 079SG can be appropriately combined with the configuration shown by the feature unit 090IW. For example, in the configuration shown by the feature unit 090IW, when executing a development effect suggesting that the time is reduced when the small hit A or the small hit B is reached, the moving image before the development (first half part) is displayed. The image display device 5 is displayed at the progress speed V1, the developed (second half) moving image is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2, and the speaker 8L is displayed during the first half execution period and the second half execution period. , 8R can output BGM, production sound, etc. at the normal playback speed (same speed) of V4. Further, it is possible to display the moving image on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2 in the super reach before the development effect.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9… Game effect lamp 10… General winning opening 11… Main board 12… Production control board 13… Voice control board 14… Lamp control board 15… Relay board 20… Ordinary symbol display 21… Gate switch 22A, 22B… Starting port Switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123… Display control unit

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous advantageous state based on the derivation display of the specific display result.
A state control means that can control a special state in which variable display is easier to execute than the normal state,
A variable means that has a special area and can be controlled into a first state in which the game medium is easy to enter and a second state in which the game medium is inaccessible or difficult to enter.
A production execution means that can execute a production,
The variable display of the first identification information can be executed based on the passage of the game medium through the first start area, and the variable display of the second identification information is executed based on the passage of the game medium through the second start area. With possible variable display execution means,
The variable means can be controlled to the first state when a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed.
The special display result includes a first special display result and a second special display result different from the first special display result.
The state control means
In the normal state, when the game medium does not pass through the special area when the first special display result is derived and displayed, the special state is controlled.
In the normal state, if the game medium does not pass through the special area when the second special display result is derived and displayed, the special state is not controlled.
The special display result is derived and displayed by executing the variable display of the first identification information, and the special display result is derived and displayed by executing the variable display of the second identification information. The rate at which the second special display result is derived and displayed is different,
The effect executing means produces different effects when the variable means is in the first state depending on whether the first special display result is derived and displayed and the second special display result is derived and displayed. A game machine characterized by being feasible.

Images